biblatex 1.1 (5jan11)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@20968 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

78 files changed, 2249 insertions, 1359 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/README
index 4711213cbdb..b5e35ee93d5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/README
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/README
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-$Id: README,v 1.0 2010/11/19 16:16:35 lehman stable $
+$Id: README,v 1.1 2011/01/05 21:45:11 lehman stable $
 
 ABOUT
 
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ fully localized and can interface with the babel package.
 
 LICENSE
 
-Copyright (c) 2006-2010 Philipp Lehman. Permission is granted to
+Copyright (c) 2006-2011 Philipp Lehman. Permission is granted to
 copy, distribute and/or modify this software under the terms of the
 LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), version 1.3. This package is
 author-maintained. This software is provided 'as is', without
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Strictly required:
 
 - e-TeX
 - BibTeX, bibtex8, or Biber
-- etoolbox 2.0 or later
+- etoolbox 2.1 or later
 - logreq 1.0 or later
 - keyval
 - ifthen
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE
index ad41887ef80..b7ecb9f5278 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE
@@ -1,4 +1,270 @@
-$Id: RELEASE,v 1.0 2010/11/19 16:16:35 lehman stable $
+$Id: RELEASE,v 1.1 2011/01/05 21:45:11 lehman stable $
+
+RELEASE NOTES FOR VERSION 1.1
+
+Starting with this release, we'll leverage the possibilities of Biber
+to support features not possible with BibTeX. That's why most major
+new features in this release are 'Biber only'.
+
+*  Biber update
+
+   Update Biber to version 0.7 when installing Biblatex 1.1. The
+   latest Biber is available from this location:
+
+   http://sourceforge.net/projects/biblatex-biber/files/
+     biblatex-biber/current/
+
+   Ready-to-run binaries are here:
+   
+   http://sourceforge.net/projects/biblatex-biber/files/
+     biblatex-biber/current/binaries/
+
+*  Configurable sorting schemes [Biber only]
+
+   This release introduces configurable sorting schemes. With Biber,
+   you may now set up arbitrary sorting specs. The new custom sorting
+   specs are very powerful and come with a flexible user interface.
+   See \DeclareSortingScheme, \DeclareSortExclusion, and
+   \DeclarePresort in the manual for details. Like the predefined
+   sorting specs, new ones are activated with the 'sorting' option.
+
+   If you are using Biber, all known sorting schemes are still
+   available by default, but they are now defined in biblatex.def
+   instead of being hard-coded in the backend.
+
+   If you are using BibTeX, note that the old hard-coded schemes in
+   biblatex.bst have not been altered. They continue to work as they
+   did before, but you can't modify them or define new ones.
+
+*  Configurable 'labelname'/'labelyear' [Biber only]
+
+   The special fields 'labelname'/'labelyear' may now be customized
+   by style authors. In conjunction with the configurable sorting
+   schemes, this dramatically increases biblatex's flexibility,
+   especially with author-year, author-title, and verbose styles. See
+   \DeclareLabelname and \DeclareLabelyear in the manual for details.
+
+*  Introducing per-type package options
+
+   Starting with this release, certain package options may be set on
+   a per-type basis. Use the new optional argument of
+   \ExecuteBibliographyOptions to specify the type. Note that most
+   per-type options are 'Biber only'. For details, see the rather
+   lengthy list of per-type options in the changelog.
+
+*  Improved static entry sets [Biber only]
+
+   Static entry sets (i.e., @set entries in the bib file) are now
+   natively supported by Biber. This means that instead of the rather
+   convoluted old setup:
+   
+   @Set{set1,
+     entryset = {key1,key2,key3},
+     crossref = {key1},
+   }
+   @Article{key1,
+     entryset = {set1},
+     author   = {...},
+     title    = {...},
+     ...
+   }
+   @InCollection{key2,
+     entryset = {set1},
+     author   = {...},
+     title    = {...},
+     ...
+   }
+   @Article{key3,
+     entryset = {set1},
+     author   = {...},
+     title    = {...},
+     ...
+   }
+
+   defining a static set is now as simple as this:
+   
+   @Set{set1,
+     entryset = {key1,key2,key3},
+   }
+
+   The 'crossref' in the @set head entry and the 'entryset' pointers
+   in the member entries are no longer required. Defining a static
+   set is now as simple as adding a @set entry with an 'entryset'
+   field specifying the set. That's all.
+
+   Since there are no 'entryset' pointers in the member entries, the
+   members may be part of a set in one document/refsection and
+   stand-alone references in another one, depending on the presence
+   of the @set entry. If the @set entry is cited, the set members are
+   grouped automatically. If not, they behave like regular entries.
+
+*  Introducing dynamic entry sets [Biber only]
+
+   Dynamic entry sets are a new way of grouping entries. They differ
+   from static ones in that they are not defined in the bib file but
+   declared in the document, i.e., they work on a per-document/
+   per-refsection basis. Instead of defining a set in the bib file:
+
+   @Set{set1,
+     entryset = {key1,key2,key3},
+   }
+   
+   you declare it like that in the document:
+
+   \defbibentryset{set1}{key1,key2,key3}
+   
+   This works anywhere in the document, including the document body.
+   Apart from that, dynamic entry sets work exactly like static ones.
+   See the manual for more information.
+
+*  mcite/mciteplus-like citation commands [Biber only]
+
+   Users of the mcite/mciteplus packages are already familiar with
+   the concept of a dynamic entry set. With mcite/mciteplus, sets are
+   defined as they are cited. To facilitate migration to biblatex,
+   this release comes with a special citation module which provides
+   mcite/mciteplus-like citation commands on top of the commands
+   provided by the main citation style. For example, the following
+   command:
+
+   \mcite{setA,*keyA1,*keyA2,*keyA3}
+
+   is equivalent to this:
+
+   \defbibentryset{setA}{keyA1,keyA2,keyA3}\cite{setA}
+   
+   Note that there is a syntactical difference between biblatex's
+   dynamic entry sets and the citation grouping of mcite/mciteplus.
+   With mcite/mciteplus, the first set member plays double-duty as
+   group identifier. With biblatex, an entry set is an entity in its
+   own right which requires a unique entry key.
+
+   For example, an mcite citation group is declared like this:
+
+   \cite{keyA1,*keyA2,*keyA3}
+   
+   In contrast to that, a dynamic entry set defined with one of the
+   commands provided by biblatex's 'mcite' package option is set up
+   like that:
+
+   \mcite{setA,*keyA1,*keyA2,*keyA3}
+   
+   Note the extra identifier 'setA': this is the entry key assigned
+   to the set. See the manual for further details.
+
+*  Low-level bibliography filters
+
+   The \defbibfilter command and the 'filter' option of
+   \printbibliography are now supplemented by \defbibcheck and the
+   corresponding 'check' option.
+   
+   Conceptually, a 'check' is like a filter controlling which entries
+   are included in a certain (sub-)bibliography. In contrast to
+   filters, however, the checks don't use a high-level syntax. Checks
+   are macros which directly employ the low-level conditionals of
+   biblatex's data interface. Here's an example 'check' which tests
+   if an entry has an abstract:
+
+   \defbibcheck{hasabstract}{%
+     \iffieldundef{abstract}{\skipentry}{}%
+   }
+   ...
+   \printbibliography[check=hasabstract]
+   
+   This will only print entries with an 'abstract' field. More complex
+   checks are possible as well. For example, this check will exclude
+   all entries published prior to the year 2000:
+
+   \defbibcheck{recent}{%
+     \iffieldint{year}
+       {\ifnumless{\thefield{year}}{2000}
+	  {\skipentry}
+	  {}}
+       {\skipentry}}
+
+   See the manual for further details.
+
+*  More flexible 'maxnames'/'minnames' controls
+
+   I've added some additional package options related to 'maxnames'/
+   'minnames'. See 'maxbibnames'/'minbibnames' and 'maxcitenames'/
+   'mincitenames' in the manual.
+
+   The new options don't introduce entirely new functionality. They
+   are rather convenience options which allow setting 'maxnames'/
+   'minnames' in a more flexible way. For example, setting the
+   'maxbibnames' option like this:
+
+   \usepackage[maxnames=3,maxbibnames=99]{biblatex}
+   
+   is equivalent to:
+   
+   \usepackage[maxnames=3]{biblatex}
+   \begin{document}
+   ...
+   \printbibliography[maxnames=99]
+   
+   'maxcitenames' does the same for all citations.
+   
+*  Defining and resetting per-type formats
+
+   \DeclareFieldFormat and related commands support per-type
+   formatting directives. By default, biblatex uses this feature to
+   format the 'title' field depending on the entry type. For example,
+   book titles are printed in italics, article titles use quotes
+   instead. In previous releases, lines like the following ones were
+   found in biblatex.def:
+
+   \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+   \DeclareFieldFormat[article]{title}{\mkbibquote{#1}}
+   \DeclareFieldFormat[inbook]{title}{\mkbibquote{#1}}
+   ...
+
+   This release brings two new features related to that.
+
+   1) \DeclareFieldFormat and related commands now support a
+   comma-separated list of entry types. This facilitates the
+   definition of per-type formats:
+
+   \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+   \DeclareFieldFormat[article,inbook,...]{title}{\mkbibquote{#1}}
+
+   2) \DeclareFieldFormat and friends now come with a starred variant
+   which resets all type-specific formats. With previous releases,
+   removing or modifying the formatting could be tedious if you
+   didn't make that book/article distrinction. You had to change the
+   default plus all type-specific formats:
+
+   \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}
+   \DeclareFieldFormat[article]{title}{#1}
+   \DeclareFieldFormat[inbook]{title}{#1}
+   ...
+   
+   The new starred commands do that in one shot:
+
+   \DeclareFieldFormat*{title}{#1}
+   
+   Note that the default formatting has not been altered. It's just a
+   bit easier to modify it now.
+
+*  New option 'mergedate' (authoryear style)
+
+   By popular request, I've added a 'mergedate' option to the
+   'authoryear' bibliography style. The option controls whether or
+   not the date label is merged with the date specification in the
+   bibliography.
+
+   For example, while mergedate=false outputs:
+
+   Doe, John (2008a). Article. In: Journal 23.5 (May 2008),
+   pp. 5-24.
+
+   mergedate=true will print:
+
+   Doe, John (May 2008a). Article. In: Journal 23.5, pp. 15-34.
+
+   Note that 'mergedate=true' is in fact the old behavior (and the
+   default setting). 'mergedate=false' is the new feature!
 
 RELEASE NOTES FOR VERSION 1.0
 
@@ -16,7 +282,7 @@ details.
 *  Development Roadmap
 
    Over the course of the 1.x development cycle, you'll increasingly
-   see new features being added which are tagged as "Biber only" in
+   see new features being added which are tagged as 'Biber only' in
    the manual. The BibTeX backend of Biblatex will be maintained for
    some more time but it won't receive any feature updates. There is
    a simple reason for that: the kind of features we'll introduce
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf
index 97446f4b9c9..296290d5815 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex
index ef6c7e178c7..10a79c4ca37 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% $Id: biblatex.tex,v 1.0 2010/11/19 16:16:35 lehman stable $
+% $Id: biblatex.tex,v 1.1 2011/01/05 21:45:11 lehman stable $
 \documentclass{ltxdockit}[2010/11/19]
 \usepackage{btxdockit}
 \usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
 \MakeAutoQuote*{<}{>}
 \MakeShortVerb{\|}
 
-\rcsid{$Id: biblatex.tex,v 1.0 2010/11/19 16:16:35 lehman stable $}
+\rcsid{$Id: biblatex.tex,v 1.1 2011/01/05 21:45:11 lehman stable $}
 
 \newcommand*{\BiblatexHome}{http://sourceforge.net/projects/biblatex/}
 \newcommand*{\BiblatexOnCTAN}{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/}
@@ -86,17 +86,19 @@ This package provides advanced bibliographic facilities for use with \latex in c
 
 \subsection{License}
 
-Copyright \textcopyright\ 2006--2010 Philipp Lehman. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and\slash or modify this software under the terms of the \lppl, version 1.3.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} This package is author"=maintained.
+Copyright \textcopyright\ 2006--2011 Philipp Lehman. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and\slash or modify this software under the terms of the \lppl, version 1.3.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} This package is author"=maintained.
 
-\subsection[Feedback]{Feedback and Acknowledgments}
+\subsection{Feedback}
 \label{int:feb}
 
 Please use the \sty{biblatex} project page on SourceForge to report bugs and submit feature requests.\fnurl{http://sourceforge.net/projects/biblatex/} There are two trackers on this page: \texttt{Bugs} for bug reports and \texttt{Features} for feature requests.\fnurl{http://sourceforge.net/tracker2/?group_id=244752} Select a tracker, then click on <Add new> to submit your report or request. I may consider implementing a new feature if the request is reasonable, seems to be relevant to a considerable number of users, and complies with the architecture and philosophy of \sty{biblatex}. Before making a feature request, please ensure that you have thoroughly studied this manual. If you do not want to report a bug or request a feature but are simply in need of assistance, you might want to consider posting your question on the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup. I can not provide end-user support by email or via the project page.
 
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+
 The language modules of this package include contributions by (in the order of submission):
 Ignacio Fernández Galván (Spanish),
 Enrico Gregorio (Italian),
-Johannes Wilm (Danish and Norwegian),
+Johannes Wilm (Danish\slash Norwegian),
 Per Starbäck, Carl-Gustav Werner, Filip Åsblom (Swedish),
 Augusto Ritter Stoffel (Brazilian),
 Alexander van Loon (Dutch),
@@ -104,7 +106,8 @@ Apostolos Syropoulos (Greek),
 Hannu Väisänen (Finnish),
 Prokopis (Greek),
 Mateus Araújo (Brazilian),
-Andrea Marchitelli (Italian).
+Andrea Marchitelli (Italian),
+José Carlos Santos (Portuguese).
  
 \subsection{Prerequisites}
 \label{int:pre}
@@ -160,7 +163,7 @@ The \sty{biblatex} package provides dedicated compatibility code for the classes
 \begin{marglist}
 
 \item[hyperref]
-The \sty{hyperref} package transforms citations into hyperlinks. See the \opt{hyperref} and \opt{backref} package options in \secref{use:opt:pre} for further details. When using the \sty{hyperref} package, it is preferable to load it after \sty{biblatex}.
+The \sty{hyperref} package transforms citations into hyperlinks. See the \opt{hyperref} and \opt{backref} package options in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for further details. When using the \sty{hyperref} package, it is preferable to load it after \sty{biblatex}.
 
 \item[showkeys]
 The \sty{showkeys} package prints the internal keys of, among other things, citations in the text and items in the bibliography. The package loading order does not matter.
@@ -191,10 +194,10 @@ The packages listed in this section are not compatible with \sty{biblatex}. Sinc
 % bibtopicprefix
 
 \item[babelbib]
-The \sty{babelbib} package provides support for multilingual bibliographies. This is a standard feature of \sty{biblatex}. Use the \bibfield{hyphenation} field and the package option \opt{babel} for similar functionality. Note that \sty{biblatex} automatically adjusts to the main document language if \sty{babel} is loaded. You only need the above mentioned features if you want to switch languages on a per"=entry basis within the bibliography. See \secref{bib:fld:spc, use:opt:pre} for details. Also see \secref{use:lng}.
+The \sty{babelbib} package provides support for multilingual bibliographies. This is a standard feature of \sty{biblatex}. Use the \bibfield{hyphenation} field and the package option \opt{babel} for similar functionality. Note that \sty{biblatex} automatically adjusts to the main document language if \sty{babel} is loaded. You only need the above mentioned features if you want to switch languages on a per"=entry basis within the bibliography. See \secref{bib:fld:spc, use:opt:pre:gen} for details. Also see \secref{use:lng}.
 
 \item[backref]
-The \sty{backref} package creates back references in the bibliography. See the package options \opt{hyperref} and \opt{backref} in \secref{use:opt:pre} for comparable functionality.
+The \sty{backref} package creates back references in the bibliography. See the package options \opt{hyperref} and \opt{backref} in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for comparable functionality.
 
 \item[bibtopic]
 The \sty{bibtopic} package provides support for bibliographies subdivided by topic, type, or other criteria. For bibliographies subdivided by topic, see the category feature in \secref{use:bib:cat} and the corresponding filters in \secref{use:bib:bib}. Alternatively, you may use the \bibfield{keywords} field in conjunction with the \opt{keyword} and \opt{notkeyword} filters for comparable functionality, see \secref{bib:fld:spc, use:bib:bib} for details. For bibliographies subdivided by type, use the \opt{type} and \opt{nottype} filters. Also see \secref{use:use:div} for examples.
@@ -206,7 +209,7 @@ The \sty{bibunits} package provides support for multiple partial (\eg per chapte
 The \sty{chapterbib} package provides support for multiple partial bibliographies. Use the \env{refsection} environment and the \opt{section} filter for comparable functionality. Alternatively, you might also want to use the \env{refsegment} environment and the \opt{segment} filter. See \secref{use:bib:sec, use:bib:seg, use:bib:bib} for details. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt} for examples.
 
 \item[cite]
-The \sty{cite} package automatically sorts numeric citations and can compress a list of consecutive numbers to a range. It also makes the punctuation used in citations configurable. For sorted and compressed numeric citations, see the \opt{sortcites} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre} and the \texttt{numeric-comp} citation style in \secref{use:xbx:cbx}. For configurable punctuation, see \secref{use:fmt}.
+The \sty{cite} package automatically sorts numeric citations and can compress a list of consecutive numbers to a range. It also makes the punctuation used in citations configurable. For sorted and compressed numeric citations, see the \opt{sortcites} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} and the \texttt{numeric-comp} citation style in \secref{use:xbx:cbx}. For configurable punctuation, see \secref{use:fmt}.
 
 \item[citeref]
 Another package for creating back references in the bibliography. See \sty{backref}.
@@ -218,7 +221,7 @@ The \sty{inlinebib} package is designed for traditional citations given in footn
 Originally designed for citations in law studies and (mostly German) judicial documents, the \sty{jurabib} package also provides features aimed at users in the humanities. In terms of the features provided, there are some similarities between \sty{jurabib} and \sty{biblatex} but the approaches taken by both packages are quite different. Since both \sty{jurabib} and \sty{biblatex} are full"=featured packages, the list of similarities and differences is too long to be discussed here.
 
 \item[mcite]
-The \sty{mcite} package provides support for the grouping of multiple citations, \ie multiple items can be cited as a single reference and listed as a single block in the bibliography. The citation groups are defined as the items are cited. This only works with unsorted bibliographies. The \sty{biblatex} package also supports grouped citations, which are called <reference sets> or <entry sets> in this manual, but the approach is different. With \sty{biblatex}, reference sets are defined in the \sty{bib} file and cited just like any other entry. See the entry type \bibtype{set} in \secref{bib:typ:blx} and \secref{use:use:set} for details.
+The \sty{mcite} package provides support for grouped citations, \ie multiple items can be cited as a single reference and listed as a single block in the bibliography. The citation groups are defined as the items are cited. This only works with unsorted bibliographies. The \sty{biblatex} package also supports grouped citations, which are called <entry sets> or <reference sets> in this manual. See \secref{use:use:set,use:bib:set,use:cit:mct} for details.
 
 \item[mciteplus]
 A significantly enhanced reimplementation of the \sty{mcite} package which supports grouping in sorted bibliographies. See \sty{mcite}.
@@ -227,7 +230,7 @@ A significantly enhanced reimplementation of the \sty{mcite} package which suppo
 The \sty{multibib} package provides support for bibliographies subdivided by topic or other criteria. See \sty{bibtopic}.
 
 \item[natbib]
-The \sty{natbib} package supports numeric and author"=year citation schemes, incorporating sorting and compression code found in the \sty{cite} package. It also provides additional citation commands and several configuration options. See the \texttt{numeric} and \texttt{author-year} citation styles and their variants in \secref{use:xbx:cbx}, the \opt{sortcites} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre}, the citation commands in \secref{use:cit}, and the facilities discussed in \secref{use:bib:hdg, use:bib:nts, use:fmt} for comparable functionality. Also see \secref{use:cit:nat}.
+The \sty{natbib} package supports numeric and author"=year citation schemes, incorporating sorting and compression code found in the \sty{cite} package. It also provides additional citation commands and several configuration options. See the \texttt{numeric} and \texttt{author-year} citation styles and their variants in \secref{use:xbx:cbx}, the \opt{sortcites} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}, the citation commands in \secref{use:cit}, and the facilities discussed in \secref{use:bib:hdg, use:bib:nts, use:fmt} for comparable functionality. Also see \secref{use:cit:nat}.
 
 \item[splitbib]
 The \sty{splitbib} package provides support for bibliographies subdivided by topic. See \sty{bibtopic}.
@@ -378,10 +381,7 @@ A technical report, research report, or white paper published by a university or
 
 \typeitem{set}
 
-A reference set. This entry type is special, see \secref{use:use:set} for details.
-
-\reqitem{entryset, crossref}
-\optitem{all}
+An entry set. This entry type is special, see \secref{use:use:set} for details.
 
 \typeitem{thesis}
 
@@ -945,11 +945,11 @@ The fields listed in this section do not hold printable data but serve a differe
 
 \fielditem{crossref}{entry key}
 
-This field holds an entry key for \bibtex's cross"=referencing feature. It is used internally by \bibtex. Child entries with a \bibfield{crossref} field inherit all data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{crossref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. This threshold is settable on the command"=line as \bibtex is launched and defaults to 2.\footnote{Also see the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre}.} Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, the child entries still inherit the data from the parent entry but their \bibfield{crossref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. See also \bibfield{xref}.
+This field holds an entry key for \bibtex's cross"=referencing feature. It is used internally by \bibtex. Child entries with a \bibfield{crossref} field inherit all data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{crossref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. This threshold is settable on the command"=line as \bibtex is launched and defaults to 2.\footnote{Also see the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.} Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, the child entries still inherit the data from the parent entry but their \bibfield{crossref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. See also \bibfield{xref}.
 
 \fielditem{entryset}{comma"=separated values}
 
-This field is specific to \bibtype{set} parent entries and the child entries of the reference set. In the parent entry, it is a comma"=separated list of entry keys which make up a reference set. In the child entries, it is the entry key of the parent. See \secref{use:use:set} for details.
+This field is specific to \bibtype{set} parent entries and the child entries of the entry set. In the parent entry, it is a comma"=separated list of entry keys which make up an entry set. In the child entries, it is the entry key of the parent. See \secref{use:use:set} for details.
 
 \fielditem{entrysubtype}{identifier}
 
@@ -1021,27 +1021,27 @@ A comma"=separated list of entry options in \keyval notation. This field is used
 
 \fielditem{presort}{string}
 
-A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. This field is the first thing the sorting algorithm considers when sorting the bibliography, hence it may be used to drastically change the sorting order. This field is only used internally by \bibtex. The default value of this string is |mm|, hence you may use the values |aa| through |ml| to move an entry towards the top of the list and |mn| through |zz| to move it towards the bottom. This may be useful when creating subdivided bibliographies with the bibliography filters. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for an in-depth explanation of the sorting process.
+A special field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. This field is the first item the sorting routine considers when sorting the bibliography, hence it may be used to arrange the entries in groups. This may be useful when creating subdivided bibliographies with the bibliography filters. This field is only used internally during sorting. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details. Also see \secref{aut:ctm:srt}.
 
 \fielditem{sortkey}{literal}
 
-A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. Think of this field as the master sort key. If present, \sty{biblatex} uses this field during sorting and ignores everything else, except for the \bibfield{presort} field. This field is only used internally during sorting. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for an in-depth explanation of the sorting process.
+A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. Think of this field as the master sort key. If present, \sty{biblatex} uses this field during sorting and ignores everything else, except for the \bibfield{presort} field. This field is only used internally during sorting. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details.
 
 \listitem{sortname}{name}
 
-A name or a list of names used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this list is used instead of \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor} when sorting the bibliography. It is only used internally during sorting. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for an in-depth explanation of the sorting process.
+A name or a list of names used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this list is used instead of \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor} when sorting the bibliography. It is only used internally during sorting. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details.
 
 \fielditem{sorttitle}{literal}
 
-A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this field is used instead of the \bibfield{title} field when sorting the bibliography. It is only used internally during sorting. The \bibfield{sorttitle} field may come in handy if you have an entry with a title like «An Introduction to\dots» and want that alphabetized under <I> rather than <A>. In this case, you could put «Introduction to\dots» in the \bibfield{sorttitle} field. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for an in-depth explanation of the sorting process.
+A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this field is used instead of the \bibfield{title} field when sorting the bibliography. It is only used internally during sorting. The \bibfield{sorttitle} field may come in handy if you have an entry with a title like «An Introduction to\dots» and want that alphabetized under <I> rather than <A>. In this case, you could put «Introduction to\dots» in the \bibfield{sorttitle} field. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details.
 
 \fielditem{sortyear}{literal}
 
-A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this field is used instead of the \bibfield{year} field when sorting the bibliography. It is only used internally during sorting. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for an in-depth explanation of the sorting process.
+A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this field is used instead of the \bibfield{year} field when sorting the bibliography. It is only used internally during sorting. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details.
 
 \fielditem{xref}{entry key}
 
-This field provides an alternative cross"=referencing mechanism. It differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit any data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{xref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. This threshold is settable with the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, their \bibfield{xref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. Please refer to \secref{bib:cav:ref} for further explanation. See also \bibfield{crossref}.
+This field provides an alternative cross"=referencing mechanism. It differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit any data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{xref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. This threshold is settable with the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, their \bibfield{xref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. Please refer to \secref{bib:cav:ref} for further explanation. See also \bibfield{crossref}.
 
 \end{fieldlist}
 
@@ -1408,7 +1408,7 @@ When specifying a page or page range, either in the \bibfield{pages} field of an
 %
 The \bibfield{bookpagination} field affects the formatting of the \bibfield{pages} and \bibfield{pagetotal} fields in the list of references. Since \texttt{page} is the default, this field is omissible in the above example. In this case, the page range will be formatted as <pp.~53--65>. Suppose that, when quoting from this work, it is customary to use verse numbers rather than page numbers in citations. This is reflected by the \bibfield{pagination} field, which affects the formatting of the \prm{postnote} argument to any citation command. With a citation like |\cite[17]{key}|, the postnote will be formatted as <v.~17>. Setting the \bibfield{pagination} field to \texttt{section} would yield <\S~17>. See \secref{use:cav:pag} for further usage instructions.
 
-The \bibfield{pagination} and \bibfield{bookpagination} fields are key fields. This package will try to use their value as a localization key, provided that the key is defined. Always use the singular form of the key name in \file{bib} files, the plural is formed automatically. The keys \texttt{page}, \texttt{column}, \texttt{line}, \texttt{verse}, \texttt{section}, and \texttt{paragraph} are predefined, with \texttt{page} being the default. The string <\texttt{none}> has a special meaning when used in a \bibfield{pagination} or \bibfield{bookpagination} field. It suppresses the prefix for the respective entry. If there are no predefined localization keys for the pagination scheme required by a certain entry, you can simply add them. See the commands \cmd{NewBibliographyString} and \cmd{DefineBibliographyStrings} in \secref{use:lng}. You need to define two bibliography strings for each additional pagination scheme: the singular form (whose localization key corresponds to the value of the \bibfield{pagination} field) and the plural form (whose localization key must be the singular plus the letter <\texttt{s}>). See the predefined keys in \secref{aut:lng:key} for examples.
+The \bibfield{pagination} and \bibfield{bookpagination} fields are key fields. This package will try to use their value as a localization key, provided that the key is defined. Always use the singular form of the key name in \file{bib} files, the plural is formed automatically. The keys \texttt{page}, \texttt{column}, \texttt{line}, \texttt{verse}, \texttt{section}, and \texttt{paragraph} are predefined, with \texttt{page} being the default. The string <\texttt{none}> has a special meaning when used in a \bibfield{pagination} or \bibfield{bookpagination} field. It suppresses the prefix for the respective entry. If there are no predefined localization keys for the pagination scheme required by a certain entry, you can simply add them. See the commands \cmd{NewBibliographyString} and \cmd{DefineBibliographyStrings} in \secref{use:lng}. You need to define two localization strings for each additional pagination scheme: the singular form (whose localization key corresponds to the value of the \bibfield{pagination} field) and the plural form (whose localization key must be the singular plus the letter <\texttt{s}>). See the predefined keys in \secref{aut:lng:key} for examples.
 
 \subsection{Hints and Caveats}
 \label{bib:cav}
@@ -1418,7 +1418,7 @@ This section provides some additional hints concerning the \bibtex interface of
 \subsubsection{Cross Referencing}
 \label{bib:cav:ref}
 
-\bibtex's \bibfield{crossref} field provides a handy cross-referencing mechanism which inherits data missing in a child entry from the corresponding parent entry indicated by the value of the \bibfield{crossref} field. Unfortunately, this mechanism is static and uses a one-on-one field mapping. This reduces its usefulness significantly because it will cause problems in quite a few cases. For example, the \bibfield{subtitle} of a cross-referenced \bibtype{collection} entry may end up in the \bibfield{subtitle} field, rather than in the \bibfield{booksubtitle} field, of the corresponding \bibtype{incollection} child entry. It is possible to work around this problem by including an empty \bibfield{subtitle} in the child entry. This package also provides an alternative cross-referencing mechanism. The \bibfield{xref} field differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit \emph{any} data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{xref} field. This implies that child entries must include all bibliographic data. The \bibfield{xref} field is merely a pointer which may be used by bibliography styles which format child entries in a special way (see \secref{aut:cav:mif} for an example). If the parent entry is referenced by a certain number of child entries, \sty{biblatex} will automatically execute the equivalent of a \cmd{nocite} command to request it from \bibtex. The threshold is controlled by the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, their \bibfield{xref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or because it has been cited explicitly in the document does not matter.
+\bibtex's \bibfield{crossref} field provides a handy cross-referencing mechanism which inherits data missing in a child entry from the corresponding parent entry indicated by the value of the \bibfield{crossref} field. Unfortunately, this mechanism is static and uses a one-on-one field mapping. This reduces its usefulness significantly because it will cause problems in quite a few cases. For example, the \bibfield{subtitle} of a cross-referenced \bibtype{collection} entry may end up in the \bibfield{subtitle} field, rather than in the \bibfield{booksubtitle} field, of the corresponding \bibtype{incollection} child entry. It is possible to work around this problem by including an empty \bibfield{subtitle} in the child entry. This package also provides an alternative cross-referencing mechanism. The \bibfield{xref} field differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit \emph{any} data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{xref} field. This implies that child entries must include all bibliographic data. The \bibfield{xref} field is merely a pointer which may be used by bibliography styles which format child entries in a special way (see \secref{aut:cav:mif} for an example). If the parent entry is referenced by a certain number of child entries, \sty{biblatex} will automatically execute the equivalent of a \cmd{nocite} command to request it from \bibtex. The threshold is controlled by the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, their \bibfield{xref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or because it has been cited explicitly in the document does not matter.
 
 \subsubsection{Capacity Issues}
 \label{bib:cav:btx}
@@ -1502,7 +1502,7 @@ Apart from it being inconvenient, there are two major issues with this conventio
 
 \paragraph{\file{bibtex8}}
 \label{bib:cav:enc:bt8}
-Switching to \file{bibtex8} will help in such cases. \file{bibtex8} can sort in a case"=sensitive way and it can handle 8-bit characters properly, provided that you supply it with a suitable \file{csf} file and give the |--csfile| switch on the command line. This also implies that it is possible to apply language specific sorting rules to the bibliography. The \sty{biblatex} package comes with \file{csf} files for some common Western European encodings. \bin{bibtex8} also ships with a few \file{csf} files. Note that \file{biblatex.bst} can not detect if it is running under traditional \bibtex or \file{bibtex8}, hence the \opt{bibtex8} package option. By default, sorting is case-insensitive since this is required for traditional \bibtex. If the \opt{bibtex8} package option is enabled, sorting is case-sensitive.
+Switching to \file{bibtex8} will help in such cases. \file{bibtex8} can sort case"=sensitively and it can handle 8-bit characters properly, provided that you supply it with a suitable \file{csf} file and give the |--csfile| switch on the command line. This also implies that it is possible to apply language specific sorting rules to the bibliography. The \sty{biblatex} package comes with \file{csf} files for some common Western European encodings. \bin{bibtex8} also ships with a few \file{csf} files. Note that \file{biblatex.bst} can not detect if it is running under traditional \bibtex or \file{bibtex8}, hence the \opt{bibtex8} package option. By default, sorting is case-insensitive since this is required for traditional \bibtex. If the \opt{bibtex8} package option is enabled, sorting is case-sensitive.
 
 Since \file{bibtex8} is backwards compatible with traditional \bibtex, it is possible to mix 8-bit input and Ascii notation. This is useful if the encoding used in the \file{bib} file does not cover all required characters. There are also a few marginal cases in which the Ascii notation scheme would yield better sorting results. A typical example is the ligature <½>. \file{bibtex8} will handle this ligature like a single character. Depending on the sorting scheme defined in the \file{csf} file, it could be treated like an <o> or alphabetized after the letter <o> but it can not be sorted as <oe>. The Ascii notation (|\oe|) is equivalent to <oe> during sorting:
 
@@ -1671,21 +1671,27 @@ Loads the citation style \path{file.cbx}. See \secref{use:xbx:cbx} for an overvi
 
 \boolitem[false]{natbib}
 
-Loads a compatibility style for the \sty{natbib} package in addition to the main citation style. The compatibility style defines aliases for the citation commands provided by the \sty{natbib} package. See \secref{use:cit:nat} for details.
+Loads compatibility module which provides aliases for the citation commands of the \sty{natbib} package. See \secref{use:cit:nat} for details.
+
+\boolitem[false]{mcite}
+
+Loads a citation module which provides \sty{mcite}\slash\sty{mciteplus}-like citation commands. See \secref{use:cit:mct} for details.
 
 \end{optionlist}
 
 \subsubsection{Preamble Options}
-\label{use:opt:pre:beg}
 \label{use:opt:pre}
 
+\paragraph{General}
+\label{use:opt:pre:gen}
+
 The following options may be used in the optional argument to \cmd{usepackage} as well as in the configuration file and the document preamble. The default value listed to the right is the package default. Note that bibliography and citation styles may modify the default setting at load time, see \secref{use:xbx} for details.
 
 \begin{optionlist}
 
-\optitem[nty]{sorting}{\opt{nty}, \opt{nyt}, \opt{nyvt}, \opt{anyt}, \opt{anyvt}, \opt{ynt}, \opt{ydnt}, \opt{none}, \opt{debug}}
+\optitem[nty]{sorting}{\opt{nty}, \opt{nyt}, \opt{nyvt}, \opt{anyt}, \opt{anyvt}, \opt{ynt}, \opt{ydnt}, \opt{none}, \opt{debug}, \prm{name}}
 
-The sorting order of the bibliography. Unless stated otherwise, the entries are sorted in ascending order. The following choices are available:
+The sorting order of the bibliography. Unless stated otherwise, the entries are sorted in ascending order. The following choices are available by default:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 \item[nty] Sort by name, title, year.
@@ -1697,13 +1703,14 @@ The sorting order of the bibliography. Unless stated otherwise, the entries are
 \item[ydnt] Sort by year (descending), name, title.
 \item[none] Do not sort at all. All entries are processed in citation order.
 \item[debug] Sort by entry key. This is intended for debugging only.
+\item[\prm{name}] \BiberOnlyMark Use \prm{name}, as defined with \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} (\secref{aut:ctm:srt})
 \end{valuelist}
 
-Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for an in"=depth explanation of the above sorting options as well as the fields considered in the sorting process. Using any of the <alphabetic> sorting orders only makes sense in conjunction with a bibliography style which prints the corresponding labels. Note that some bibliography styles initialize this package option to a value different from the package default (\opt{nty}). See \secref{use:xbx:bbx} for details.
+Using any of the <alphabetic> sorting schemes only makes sense in conjunction with a bibliography style which prints the corresponding labels. Note that some bibliography styles initialize this package option to a value different from the package default (\opt{nty}). See \secref{use:xbx:bbx} for details. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for an in"=depth explanation of the above sorting options as well as the fields considered in the sorting process. See also \secref{aut:ctm:srt} on how to adapt the predefined schemes or define new ones.
 
 \boolitem[true]{sortcase}
 
-Whether to sort the bibliography and the list of shorthands in a case"=sensitive way. Note that case"=sensitive sorting is only supported by the \bin{bibtex8} and Biber backends. Sorting is always case"=insensitive with legacy \bibtex. See the \opt{backend} option for details.
+Whether to sort the bibliography and the list of shorthands case"=sensitively. Note that case"=sensitive sorting is only supported by the \bin{bibtex8} and Biber backends. Sorting is always case"=insensitive with legacy \bibtex. See the \opt{backend} option for details.
 
 \boolitem[true]{sortupper}[\BiberOnly]
 
@@ -1728,11 +1735,27 @@ Whether to sort citations if multiple entry keys are passed to a citation comman
 
 \intitem[3]{maxnames}
 
-A threshold affecting all lists of names (\bibfield{author}, \bibfield{editor}, etc.). If a list exceeds this threshold, \ie if it contains more than \prm{integer} names, it is automatically truncated according to the setting of the \opt{minnames} package option.
+A threshold affecting all lists of names (\bibfield{author}, \bibfield{editor}, etc.). If a list exceeds this threshold, \ie if it contains more than \prm{integer} names, it is automatically truncated according to the setting of the \opt{minnames} option.
 
 \intitem[1]{minnames}
 
-A limit affecting all lists of names (\bibfield{author}, \bibfield{editor}, etc.). If a list contains more than \prm{maxnames} names, it is automatically truncated to \prm{minnames} names in citations and in the bibliography. This also affects the sorting of the bibliography and the generation of labels. The value of \prm{minnames} must be smaller than or equal to \prm{maxnames}.
+A limit affecting all lists of names (\bibfield{author}, \bibfield{editor}, etc.). If a list contains more than \prm{maxnames} names, it is automatically truncated to \prm{minnames} names in citations and in the bibliography. This also affects the sorting of the bibliography and the generation of labels. The \prm{minnames} value must be smaller than or equal to \prm{maxnames}.
+
+\intitem[\prm{maxnames}]{maxbibnames}
+
+The \opt{maxnames} and \opt{minnames} options may also be used locally in the optional arguments of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{printshorthands} (see \secref{use:bib:bib,use:bib:los}). The \opt{maxbibnames} and \opt{minbibnames} options have precisely the same effect, except that they are settable in the preamble. Note that \prm{maxbibnames} should normally not be less then \prm{maxnames} because the latter affects the generation of labels.
+
+\intitem[\prm{minnames}]{minbibnames}
+
+Similar to \opt{maxbibnames} but defining the lower limit. This value must must be smaller than or equal to \prm{maxbibnames}. Note that \prm{minbibnames} should normally not be less then \prm{minnames} because the latter affects the generation of labels.
+
+\intitem[\prm{maxnames}]{maxcitenames}
+
+The number of names printed in citations normally corresponds to the \prm{maxnames} and \prm{minnames} values. The \opt{maxcitenames} and \opt{mincitenames} options define different values for use in all citations. Note that \prm{maxcitenames} should normally not be less then \prm{maxnames} because the latter affects the generation of labels.
+
+\intitem[\prm{minnames}]{mincitenames}
+
+Similar to \opt{maxcitenames} but defining the lower limit. This value must be smaller than or equal to \prm{maxcitenames}. Note that \prm{mincitenames} should normally not be less then \prm{minnames} because the latter affects the generation of labels.
 
 \intitem[3]{maxitems}
 
@@ -1863,9 +1886,9 @@ This option controls how sequences of consecutive pages in the list of back refe
 
 \item[two] Compress any sequence of two or more consecutive pages to a range, \eg the above list is compressed to <1--2, 11--13, 21--24>.
 
-\item[two+] Similar in concept to \opt{two} but a sequence of exactely two consecutive pages is printed using the starting page and the bibliography string \texttt{sequens}, \eg the above list is compressed to <1\,sq., 11--13, 21--24>.
+\item[two+] Similar in concept to \opt{two} but a sequence of exactely two consecutive pages is printed using the starting page and the localization string \texttt{sequens}, \eg the above list is compressed to <1\,sq., 11--13, 21--24>.
 
-\item[three+] Similar in concept to \opt{two+} but a sequence of exactly three consecutive pages is printed using the starting page and the bibliography string \texttt{sequentes}, \eg the above list is compressed to <1\,sq., 11\,sqq., 21--24>.
+\item[three+] Similar in concept to \opt{two+} but a sequence of exactly three consecutive pages is printed using the starting page and the localization string \texttt{sequentes}, \eg the above list is compressed to <1\,sq., 11\,sqq., 21--24>.
 
 \item[all+] Similar in concept to \opt{three+} but any sequence of consecutive pages is printed as an open-ended range, \eg the above list is compressed to <1\,sq., 11\,sqq., 21\,sqq.>.
 
@@ -1895,7 +1918,7 @@ This option controls how back references to \bibtype{set} entires and their memb
 
 \optitem[false]{indexing}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{cite}, \opt{bib}}
 
-This option controls indexing in citations and in the bibliography. More precisely, it affects the \cmd{ifciteindex} and \cmd{ifbibindex} commands from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. The possible choices are:
+This option controls indexing in citations and in the bibliography. More precisely, it affects the \cmd{ifciteindex} and \cmd{ifbibindex} commands from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. The option is settable on a global, a per-type, or on a per-entry basis. The possible choices are:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 \item[true] Enable indexing globally.
@@ -2055,10 +2078,10 @@ Sets the minimum number of cross references to \prm{integer} when requesting a \
 
 \end{optionlist}
 
-\subsubsection{Style Options}
-\label{use:opt:bbx}
+\paragraph{Style-specific}
+\label{use:opt:pre:bbx}
 
-The following options are provided by the standard styles (as opposed to the core package). Technically, they are preamble options like those in \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+The following options are provided by the standard styles (as opposed to the core package). Technically, they are preamble options like those in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \begin{optionlist}
 
@@ -2080,74 +2103,8 @@ This option controls whether \bibfield{eprint} information is printed.
 
 \end{optionlist}
 
-\subsubsection{Entry Options}
-\label{use:opt:bib}
-
-Entry options are package options which can be adjusted on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field from \secref{bib:fld:spc}.
-
-\paragraph{Hybrid Entry/Preamble Options}
-\label{use:opt:bib:hyb}
-
-The following options are settable on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field. In addition to that, they may also be used in the optional argument to \cmd{usepackage} as well as in the configuration file and the document preamble. This is useful if you want to change the default behavior globally.
-
-\begin{optionlist}
-
-\boolitem[true]{useauthor}
-
-Whether the \bibfield{author} is used in labels and considered during sorting. This may be useful if an entry includes an \bibfield{author} field but is usually not cited by author for some reason. Setting \kvopt{useauthor}{false} does not mean that the \bibfield{author} is ignored completely. It means that the \bibfield{author} is not used in labels and ignored during sorting. The entry will then be alphabetized by \bibfield{editor} or \bibfield{title}. With the standard styles, the \bibfield{author} is printed after the title in this case. See also \secref{use:srt}.
-
-\boolitem[true]{useeditor}
-
-Whether the \bibfield{editor} replaces a missing \bibfield{author} in labels and during sorting. This may be useful if an entry includes an \bibfield{editor} field but is usually not cited by editor. Setting \kvopt{useeditor}{false} does not mean that the \bibfield{editor} is ignored completely. It means that the \bibfield{editor} does not replace a missing \bibfield{author} in labels and during sorting. The entry will then be alphabetized by \bibfield{title}. With the standard styles, the \bibfield{editor} is printed after the title in this case. See also \secref{use:srt}.
-
-\boolitem[false]{usetranslator}
-
-Whether the \bibfield{translator} replaces a missing \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor} in labels and during sorting. Setting \kvopt{usetranslator}{true} does not mean that the \bibfield{translator} overrides the \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor}. It means that the \bibfield{translator} is considered as a fallback if the \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor} is missing or if \opt{useauthor} and \opt{useeditor} are set to \texttt{false}. In other words, in order to cite a book by translator rather than by author, you need to set the following options:
-
-\begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
-@Book{...,
-  options    = {useauthor=false,usetranslator=true},
-  author     = {...},
-  translator = {...},
-  ...
-\end{lstlisting}
-%
-With the standard styles, the \bibfield{translator} is printed after the title by default. See also \secref{use:srt}.
-
-\boolitem[false]{useprefix}
-
-Whether the name prefix (von, van, of, da, de, della, etc.) is considered when printing the last name in citations. This also affects the sorting and formatting of the bibliography as well as the generation of certain types of labels. If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} always precedes the last name with the prefix. For example, Ludwig van Beethoven would be cited as «Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Beethoven, Ludwig van» by default. If this option is enabled, he is cited as «van Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Van Beethoven, Ludwig» instead.
-
-\end{optionlist}
-
-\paragraph{Dedicated Entry Options}
-\label{use:opt:bib:ded}
-
-The following options are only settable on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field. They are not available globally.
-
-\begin{optionlist}
-
-\boolitem[false]{skipbib}
-
-If this option is enabled, the entry is excluded from the bibliography but it may still be cited.
-
-\boolitem[false]{skiplos}
-
-If this option is enabled, the entry is excluded from the list of shorthands. It is still included in the bibliography and it may also be cited by shorthand.
-
-\boolitem[false]{skiplab}
-
-If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} will not assign any labels to the entry. It is not required for normal operation. Use it with care. If enabled, \sty{biblatex} can not guarantee unique citations for the respective entry and citations styles which require labels may fail to create valid citations for the entry.
-
-\boolitem[false]{dataonly}
-
-Setting this option is equivalent to \opt{skipbib}, \opt{skiplos}, and \opt{skiplab}. It is not required for normal operation. Use it with care.
-
-\end{optionlist}
-
-\subsubsection{Internal Options}
-\label{use:opt:pre:end}
-\label{use:opt:int}
+\paragraph{Internal}
+\label{use:opt:pre:int}
 
 The default settings of the following preamble options are controlled by bibliography and citation styles. Apart from the \opt{pagetracker} and \opt{firstinits} options, which you may want to adapt, there is normally no need to set them explicitly.
 
@@ -2174,8 +2131,8 @@ This option controls the citation tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifcitese
 \item[true] Enable the tracker in global mode.
 \item[false] Disable the tracker.
 \item[context] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive mode. In this mode, citations in footnotes and in the body text are tracked independently.
-\item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, an item is only considered if it appeared in a stand-alone citation, \ie if a single entry key was passed to the citation command.
-\item[constrict] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive strict mode. This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}.
+\item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, an item is only considered by the tracker if it appeared in a stand-alone citation, \ie if a single entry key was passed to the citation command.
+\item[constrict] This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}.
 \end{valuelist}
 
 Note that this tracker is disabled in all floats, see \secref{aut:cav:flt}.
@@ -2189,49 +2146,49 @@ This option controls the <ibidem> tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifciteib
 \item[false] Disable the tracker.
 \item[context] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive mode. In this mode, citations in footnotes and in the body text are tracked separately.
 \item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, potentially ambiguous references are suppressed. A reference is considered ambiguous if either the current citation (the one including the <ibidem>) or the previous citation (the one the <ibidem> refers to) consists of a list of references.\footnote{For example, suppose the initial citation is «Jones, \emph{Title}; Williams, \emph{Title}» and the following one «ibidem». From a technical point of view, it is fairly clear that the <ibidem> refers to <Williams> because this is the last reference processed by the previous citation command. To a human reader, however, this may not be obvious because the <ibidem> may also refer to both titles. The strict mode avoids such ambiguous references.}
-\item[constrict] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive strict mode. This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}. It also keeps track of footnote numbers and detects potentially ambiguous references in footnotes in a stricter way than the \opt{strict} option. In addition to the conditions imposed by the \opt{strict} option, a reference in a footnote will only be considered as unambiguous if the current citation and the previous citation are given in the same footnote or in immediately consecutive footnotes.
+\item[constrict] This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}. It also keeps track of footnote numbers and detects potentially ambiguous references in footnotes in a stricter way than the \opt{strict} option. In addition to the conditions imposed by the \opt{strict} option, a reference in a footnote will only be considered as unambiguous if the current citation and the previous citation are given in the same footnote or in immediately consecutive footnotes.
 \end{valuelist}
 
 Note that this tracker is disabled in all floats, see \secref{aut:cav:flt}.
 
-\optitem[false]{idemtracker}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{context}, \opt{strict}, \opt{constrict}}
+\optitem[false]{opcittracker}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{context}, \opt{strict}, \opt{constrict}}
 
-This option controls the <idem> tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifciteidem} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. The possible choices are:
+This option controls the <opcit> tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifopcit} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. This feature is similar to the <ibidem> tracker, except that it tracks citations on a per-author/editor basis, \ie \cmd{ifopcit} will yield \texttt{true} if the cited item is the same as the last one by this author\slash editor. The possible choices are:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 \item[true] Enable the tracker in global mode.
 \item[false] Disable the tracker.
 \item[context] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive mode. In this mode, citations in footnotes and in the body text are tracked separately.
-\item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, potentially ambiguous references are suppressed. See the \kvopt{ibidtracker}{strict} option above for details.
-\item[constrict] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive strict mode. This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}. See the \kvopt{ibidtracker}{constrict} option above for details.
+\item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, potentially ambiguous references are suppressed. See \kvopt{ibidtracker}{strict} for details.
+\item[constrict] This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}. See the explanation of \kvopt{ibidtracker}{constrict} for details.
 \end{valuelist}
 
 Note that this tracker is disabled in all floats, see \secref{aut:cav:flt}.
 
-\optitem[false]{opcittracker}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{context}, \opt{strict}, \opt{constrict}}
+\optitem[false]{loccittracker}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{context}, \opt{strict}, \opt{constrict}}
 
-This option controls the <opcit> tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifopcit} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. This feature is similar to the <ibidem> tracker except that it tracks citations on a per-author/editor basis, \ie \cmd{ifopcit} will yield \texttt{true} if the cited item is the same as the last one by this author\slash editor. The possible choices are:
+This option controls the <loccit> tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifloccit} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. This feature is similar to the <opcit> tracker except that it also checks whether the \prm{postnote} arguments match, \ie \cmd{ifloccit} will yield \texttt{true} if the citation refers to the same page cited before. The possible choices are:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 \item[true] Enable the tracker in global mode.
 \item[false] Disable the tracker.
 \item[context] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive mode. In this mode, citations in footnotes and in the body text are tracked separately.
-\item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, potentially ambiguous references are suppressed. See the \kvopt{ibidtracker}{strict} option above for details.
-\item[constrict] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive strict mode. This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}. See the \kvopt{ibidtracker}{constrict} option above for details.
+\item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, potentially ambiguous references are suppressed. See \kvopt{ibidtracker}{strict} for details. In addition to that, this mode also checks if the \prm{postnote} argument is numerical (based on \cmd{ifnumerals} from \secref{aut:aux:tst}).
+\item[constrict] This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}. See the explanation of \kvopt{ibidtracker}{constrict} for details. In addition to that, this mode also checks if the \prm{postnote} argument is numerical (based on \cmd{ifnumerals} from \secref{aut:aux:tst}).
 \end{valuelist}
 
 Note that this tracker is disabled in all floats, see \secref{aut:cav:flt}.
 
-\optitem[false]{loccittracker}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{context}, \opt{strict}, \opt{constrict}}
+\optitem[false]{idemtracker}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{context}, \opt{strict}, \opt{constrict}}
 
-This option controls the <loccit> tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifloccit} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. This feature is similar to the <opcit> tracker except that it also checks whether the \prm{postnote} arguments match, \ie \cmd{ifloccit} will yield \texttt{true} if the citation refers to the same page cited before. The possible choices are:
+This option controls the <idem> tracker which is required by the \cmd{ifciteidem} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. The possible choices are:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 \item[true] Enable the tracker in global mode.
 \item[false] Disable the tracker.
 \item[context] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive mode. In this mode, citations in footnotes and in the body text are tracked separately.
-\item[strict] Enable the tracker in strict mode. In this mode, potentially ambiguous references are suppressed. See the \kvopt{ibidtracker}{strict} option above for details. In addition to that, this mode also checks if the \prm{postnote} argument is numerical (in the sense of \cmd{ifnumerals} from \secref{aut:aux:tst}).
-\item[constrict] Enable the tracker in context"=sensitive strict mode. This mode combines the features of \opt{context} and \opt{strict}. See the \kvopt{ibidtracker}{constrict} option above for details. In addition to that, this mode also checks if the \prm{postnote} argument is numerical (in the sense of \cmd{ifnumerals} from \secref{aut:aux:tst}).
+\item[strict] This is an alias of \texttt{true}, provided only for consistency with the other trackers. Since <idem> replacements do not get ambiguous in the same way as <ibidem> or <op.~cit.>, the \texttt{strict} tracking mode does not apply to them.
+\item[constrict] This mode is similar to \opt{context} with one additional condition: a reference in a footnote will only be considered as unambiguous if the current citation and the previous citation are given in the same footnote or in immediately consecutive footnotes.
 \end{valuelist}
 
 Note that this tracker is disabled in all floats, see \secref{aut:cav:flt}.
@@ -2255,22 +2212,104 @@ This option controls the format of all initials generated by \sty{biblatex}. By
 \boolitem[false]{labelalpha}
 
 Whether to provide the special fields \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha}, see \secref{aut:bbx:fld} for details.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
 
 \boolitem[false]{labelnumber}
 
 Whether to provide the special field \bibfield{labelnumber}, see \secref{aut:bbx:fld} for details.
+This option is also settable on a per-type basis.
 
 \boolitem[false]{labelyear}
 
 Whether to provide the special fields \bibfield{labelyear} and \bibfield{extrayear}, see \secref{aut:bbx:fld} for details.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
 
 \boolitem[false]{singletitle}
 
 Whether to provide the data required by the \cmd{ifsingletitle} test, see \secref{aut:aux:tst} for details.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
 
 \optitem[false]{uniquename}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{init}}
 
 Whether to set the \cnt{uniquename} counter, see \secref{aut:aux:tst} for details. This feature is useful in citation styles which add initials or other parts of the name when citing different authors with the same last name. If the citation style uses initials to disambiguate names but never prints the full name in citations, set the option to \texttt{init} rather than \texttt{true}. This difference is crucial because the state of this option will also affect the \cmd{ifsingletitle} test and the \bibfield{extrayear} field. Do not set the option to \texttt{true} in citation styles which only print initials to disambiguate names.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\end{optionlist}
+
+\subsubsection{Entry Options}
+\label{use:opt:bib}
+
+Entry options are package options which can be adjusted on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field from \secref{bib:fld:spc}.
+
+\paragraph{Preamble/Type/Entry Options}
+\label{use:opt:bib:hyb}
+
+The following options are settable on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field. In addition to that, they may also be used in the optional argument to \cmd{usepackage} as well as in the configuration file and the document preamble. This is useful if you want to change the default behavior globally.
+
+\begin{optionlist}
+
+\boolitem[true]{useauthor}
+
+Whether the \bibfield{author} is used in labels and considered during sorting. This may be useful if an entry includes an \bibfield{author} field but is usually not cited by author for some reason. Setting \kvopt{useauthor}{false} does not mean that the \bibfield{author} is ignored completely. It means that the \bibfield{author} is not used in labels and ignored during sorting. The entry will then be alphabetized by \bibfield{editor} or \bibfield{title}. With the standard styles, the \bibfield{author} is printed after the title in this case. See also \secref{use:srt}.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\boolitem[true]{useeditor}
+
+Whether the \bibfield{editor} replaces a missing \bibfield{author} in labels and during sorting. This may be useful if an entry includes an \bibfield{editor} field but is usually not cited by editor. Setting \kvopt{useeditor}{false} does not mean that the \bibfield{editor} is ignored completely. It means that the \bibfield{editor} does not replace a missing \bibfield{author} in labels and during sorting. The entry will then be alphabetized by \bibfield{title}. With the standard styles, the \bibfield{editor} is printed after the title in this case. See also \secref{use:srt}.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\boolitem[false]{usetranslator}
+
+Whether the \bibfield{translator} replaces a missing \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor} in labels and during sorting. Setting \kvopt{usetranslator}{true} does not mean that the \bibfield{translator} overrides the \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor}. It means that the \bibfield{translator} is considered as a fallback if the \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor} is missing or if \opt{useauthor} and \opt{useeditor} are set to \texttt{false}. In other words, in order to cite a book by translator rather than by author, you need to set the following options:
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
+@Book{...,
+  options    = {useauthor=false,usetranslator=true},
+  author     = {...},
+  translator = {...},
+  ...
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+With the standard styles, the \bibfield{translator} is printed after the title by default. See also \secref{use:srt}.
+
+\boolitem[false]{useprefix}
+
+Whether the name prefix (von, van, of, da, de, della, etc.) is considered when printing the last name in citations. This also affects the sorting and formatting of the bibliography as well as the generation of certain types of labels. If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} always precedes the last name with the prefix. For example, Ludwig van Beethoven would be cited as «Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Beethoven, Ludwig van» by default. If this option is enabled, he is cited as «van Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Van Beethoven, Ludwig» instead.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\optitem{indexing}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{cite}, \opt{bib}}
+
+The \opt{indexing} option is also settable per-type or per-entry basis. See \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for details.
+
+\end{optionlist}
+
+\paragraph{Type/Entry Options}
+\label{use:opt:bib:ded}
+
+The following options are only settable on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field. They are not available globally.
+
+\begin{optionlist}
+
+\boolitem[false]{skipbib}
+
+If this option is enabled, the entry is excluded from the bibliography but it may still be cited.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\boolitem[false]{skiplos}
+
+If this option is enabled, the entry is excluded from the list of shorthands. It is still included in the bibliography and it may also be cited by shorthand.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\boolitem[false]{skiplab}
+
+If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} will not assign any labels to the entry. It is not required for normal operation. Use it with care. If enabled, \sty{biblatex} can not guarantee unique citations for the respective entry and citations styles which require labels may fail to create valid citations for the entry.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
+
+\boolitem[false]{dataonly}
+
+Setting this option is equivalent to \opt{skipbib}, \opt{skiplos}, and \opt{skiplab}. It is not required for normal operation. Use it with care.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
 
 \end{optionlist}
 
@@ -2295,15 +2334,17 @@ Apart from writing new citation and bibliography styles, there are numerous ways
 
 If available, this package will load the configuration file \path{biblatex.cfg}. This file is read at the end of the package, immediately after the citation and bibliography styles have been loaded.
 
-\subsubsection{Executing Package Options}
+\subsubsection{Setting Package Options}
 \label{use:cfg:opt}
 
-The load-time package options in \secref{use:opt:ldt} must be given in the optional argument to \cmd{usepackage}. The package options in \secref{use:opt:pre:beg}--\ref{use:opt:pre:end}, except those in \secref{use:opt:bib:ded}, may also be given in the preamble. The options are executed with the following command:
+The load-time package options in \secref{use:opt:ldt} must be given in the optional argument to \cmd{usepackage}. The package options in \secref{use:opt:pre} may also be given in the preamble. The options are executed with the following command:
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
-\cmditem{ExecuteBibliographyOptions}{key=value,\,\dots}
 
-This command may also be used in the configuration file to modify the default setting of a package option.
+\cmditem{ExecuteBibliographyOptions}[entry type, \dots]{key=value, \dots}
+
+This command may also be used in the configuration file to modify the default setting of a package option. Certain options are also settable on a per-type basis. In this case, the optional \prm{entry type} argument specifies the entry type. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values.
+
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
 \subsection{Standard Styles}
@@ -2319,7 +2360,7 @@ The citation styles which come with this package implement several common citati
 \begin{marglist}
 
 \item[numeric]
-This style implements a numeric citation scheme similar to the standard bibliographic facilities of \latex. It should be employed in conjunction with a numeric bibliography style which prints the corresponding labels in the bibliography. It is intended for in-text citations. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{autocite}{inline}, \kvopt{labelnumber}{true}. This style also provides an additional preamble option called \opt{subentry} which affects the handling of reference sets. If this option is disabled, citations referring to a member of a set will point to the entire set. If it is enabled, the style supports citations like «[5c]» which point to a subentry in a set (the third one in this example). See the style example for details.
+This style implements a numeric citation scheme similar to the standard bibliographic facilities of \latex. It should be employed in conjunction with a numeric bibliography style which prints the corresponding labels in the bibliography. It is intended for in-text citations. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{autocite}{inline}, \kvopt{labelnumber}{true}. This style also provides an additional preamble option called \opt{subentry} which affects the handling of entry sets. If this option is disabled, citations referring to a member of a set will point to the entire set. If it is enabled, the style supports citations like «[5c]» which point to a subentry in a set (the third one in this example). See the style example for details.
 
 \item[numeric-comp]
 A compact variant of the \texttt{numeric} style which prints a list of more than two consecutive numbers as a range. This style is similar to the \sty{cite} package and the \opt{sort\&compress} option of the \sty{natbib} package in numerical mode. For example, instead of «[8, 3, 1, 7, 2]» this style would print «[1--3, 7, 8]». It is intended for in-text citations. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{autocite}{inline}, \kvopt{sortcites}{true}, \kvopt{labelnumber}{true}. It also provides the \opt{subentry} option.
@@ -2412,13 +2453,13 @@ All bibliography styles which come with this package use the same basic format f
 \begin{marglist}
 
 \item[numeric]
-This style prints a numeric label similar to the standard bibliographic facilities of \latex. It is intended for use in conjunction with a numeric citation style. Note that the \bibfield{shorthand} field overrides the default label. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{labelnumber}{true}. This style also provides an additional preamble option called \opt{subentry} which affects the formatting of reference sets. If this option is enabled, all members of a set are marked with a letter which may be used in citations referring to a set member rather than the entire set. See the style example for details.
+This style prints a numeric label similar to the standard bibliographic facilities of \latex. It is intended for use in conjunction with a numeric citation style. Note that the \bibfield{shorthand} field overrides the default label. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{labelnumber}{true}. This style also provides an additional preamble option called \opt{subentry} which affects the formatting of entry sets. If this option is enabled, all members of a set are marked with a letter which may be used in citations referring to a set member rather than the entire set. See the style example for details.
 
 \item[alphabetic]
 This style prints an alphabetic label similar to the \path{alpha.bst} style of traditional \bibtex. It is intended for use in conjunction with an alphabetic citation style. Note that the \bibfield{shorthand} field overrides the default label. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{labelalpha}{true}, \kvopt{sorting}{anyt}.
 
 \item[authoryear]
-This style differs from the other styles in that the publication date is not printed towards the end of the entry but rather after the author\slash editor. It is intended for use in conjunction with an author"=year citation style. Recurring author and editor names are replaced by a dash unless the entry is the first one on the current page or double-page spread. This style also provides an additional preamble option called \opt{dashed} which controls this feature. See the style example for details. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{labelyear}{true}, \kvopt{sorting}{nyt}, \kvopt{pagetracker}{true}.
+This style differs from the other styles in that the publication date is not printed towards the end of the entry but rather after the author\slash editor. It is intended for use in conjunction with an author"=year citation style. Recurring author and editor names are replaced by a dash unless the entry is the first one on the current page or double-page spread. This style provides an additional preamble option called \opt{dashed} which controls this feature. It also provided a preamble option called \opt{mergedate}. See the style example for details. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{labelyear}{true}, \kvopt{sorting}{nyt}, \kvopt{pagetracker}{true}, \kvopt{mergedate}{true}.
 
 \item[authortitle]
 This style does not print any label at all. It is intended for use in conjunction with an author"=title citation style. Recurring author and editor names are replaced by a dash unless the entry is the first one on the current page or double-page spread. This style also provides an additional preamble option called \opt{dashed} which controls this feature. See the style example for details. The style will set the following package options at load time: \kvopt{pagetracker}{true}.
@@ -2446,6 +2487,8 @@ This style prints all bibliographic data in tabular format. It is intended for d
 \subsection{Sorting Options}
 \label{use:srt}
 
+% \fixme{update}
+
 \begin{table}
 \sorttablesetup
 \begin{tabularx}{\columnwidth}{@{}O@{}lrlrlrlrX@{}}
@@ -2500,7 +2543,7 @@ nyvt    &\bibfield{presort}&\new&\bibfield{sortname}
 \label{use:srt:tab1}
 \end{table}
 
-This package supports various sorting schemes for the bibliography. The sorting scheme is selected with the \opt{sorting} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre}. Apart from the regular data fields there are also some special fields which may be used to optimize the sorting of the bibliography. \Tabref{use:srt:tab1, use:srt:tab2} give an outline of the alphabetic sorting schemes supported by this package. Chronological sorting schemes are listed in \tabref{use:srt:tab3}. A few explanations concerning these tables are in order.
+This package supports various sorting schemes for the bibliography. The sorting scheme is selected with the \opt{sorting} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Apart from the regular data fields there are also some special fields which may be used to optimize the sorting of the bibliography. \Tabref{use:srt:tab1, use:srt:tab2} give an outline of the alphabetic sorting schemes supported by this package. Chronological sorting schemes are listed in \tabref{use:srt:tab3}. A few explanations concerning these tables are in order.
 
 The first item considered in the sorting process is always the \bibfield{presort} field of the entry. If this field is undefined, this package will use the default value <\texttt{mm}> as a presort string. The next item considered is the \bibfield{sortkey} field. If this field is defined, it serves as the master sort key. Apart from the \bibfield{presort} field, no further data is considered in this case. If the \bibfield{sortkey} field is undefined, sorting continues with the name. The package will try using the \bibfield{sortname}, \bibfield{author}, \bibfield{editor}, and \bibfield{translator} fields, in this order. Which fields are considered also depends on the setting of the \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} options. If all three of them are disabled, the \bibfield{sortname} field is ignored as well. Note that all name fields are responsive to the setting of the global \opt{maxnames} and \opt{minnames} options. If no name field is available, either because all of them are undefined or because \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} are disabled, this package will fall back to the \bibfield{sorttitle} and \bibfield{title} fields as a last resort. The remaining items are, in various order: the \bibfield{sortyear} field, if defined, or the first four digits of the \bibfield{year} field otherwise; the \bibfield{sorttitle} field, if defined, or the \bibfield{title} field otherwise; the \bibfield{volume} field, which is padded to four digits with leading zeros, or the string \texttt{0000} otherwise. Note that the sorting schemes shown in \tabref{use:srt:tab2} include an additional item: \bibfield{labelalpha} is the label used by <alphabetic> bibliography styles. Strictly speaking, the string used for sorting is \bibfield{labelalpha}~+ \bibfield{extraalpha}. The sorting schemes in \tabref{use:srt:tab2} are intended to be used in conjunction with alphabetic styles only.
 
@@ -2605,7 +2648,7 @@ ydnt    &\bibfield{presort}&\new&\bibfield{sortyear} (desc.)
 
 This command is used in the document preamble to specify a single \file{bib} file or a comma"=separated list of \file{bib} files. It does not print anything.
 
-\cmditem{printbibliography}[key=value,\,\dots]
+\cmditem{printbibliography}[key=value, \dots]
 
 This command prints the bibliography. It takes one optional argument, which is a list of options given in \keyval notation. The following options are available:
 
@@ -2691,37 +2734,41 @@ Print only entries not assigned to category \prm{category}. This option may be u
 
 \valitem{filter}{name}
 
-Print only entries matching the filter \prm{name}, as defined with \cmd{defbibfilter}. See \secref{use:bib:flt} for details.
+Filter the entries with filter \prm{name}, as defined with \cmd{defbibfilter}. See \secref{use:bib:flt} for details.
+
+\valitem{check}{name}
+
+Filter the entries with check \prm{name}, as defined with \cmd{defbibcheck}. See \secref{use:bib:flt} for details.
 
 \valitem{prefixnumbers}{string}
 
-This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre} be enabled globally. Setting this option will implicitly enable \opt{resetnumbers} for the current bibliography. The option assigns the \prm{string} as a prefix to all entries in the respective bibliography. For example, if the \prm{string} is \texttt{A}, the numerical labels printed will be \texttt{[A1]}, \texttt{[A2]}, \texttt{[A3]}, etc. This is useful for subdivided numerical bibliographies where each subbibliography uses a different prefix. The \prm{string} is available to styles in the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of all affected entries. See \secref{aut:bbx:fld:lab} for details.
+This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. Setting this option will implicitly enable \opt{resetnumbers} for the current bibliography. The option assigns the \prm{string} as a prefix to all entries in the respective bibliography. For example, if the \prm{string} is \texttt{A}, the numerical labels printed will be \texttt{[A1]}, \texttt{[A2]}, \texttt{[A3]}, etc. This is useful for subdivided numerical bibliographies where each subbibliography uses a different prefix. The \prm{string} is available to styles in the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of all affected entries. See \secref{aut:bbx:fld:lab} for details.
 
 \boolitem{resetnumbers}
 
-This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre} be enabled globally. If enabled, it will reset the numerical labels assigned to the entries in the respective bibliography, \ie the numbering will restart at~1. Use this option with care as \sty{biblatex} can not guarantee unique labels globally if they are reset manually.
+This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. If enabled, it will reset the numerical labels assigned to the entries in the respective bibliography, \ie the numbering will restart at~1. Use this option with care as \sty{biblatex} can not guarantee unique labels globally if they are reset manually.
 
 \boolitem{omitnumbers}
 
-This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre} be enabled globally. If enabled, \sty{biblatex} will not assign a numerical label to the entries in the respective bibliography. This is useful when mixing a numerical subbibliography with one or more subbibliographies using a different scheme (\eg author-title or author-year).
+This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. If enabled, \sty{biblatex} will not assign a numerical label to the entries in the respective bibliography. This is useful when mixing a numerical subbibliography with one or more subbibliographies using a different scheme (\eg author-title or author-year).
 
 \end{optionlist*}
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
-\cmditem{bibbysection}[key=value,\,\dots]
+\cmditem{bibbysection}[key=value, \dots]
 
 This command automatically loops over all reference sections. This is equivalent to giving one \cmd{printbibliography} command for every section but has the additional benefit of automatically skipping sections without references. Note that \cmd{bibbysection} starts looking for references in section \texttt{1}. It will ignore references given outside of \env{refsection} environments since they are assigned to section \texttt{0}. See \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples. The options are a subset of those supported by \cmd{printbibliography}. Valid options are \opt{env}, \opt{heading}, \opt{prenote}, \opt{postnote}, \opt{maxnames}, \opt{minnames}, \opt{maxitems}, \opt{minitems}.
 
-\cmditem{bibbysegment}[key=value,\,\dots]
+\cmditem{bibbysegment}[key=value, \dots]
 
 This command automatically loops over all reference segments. This is equivalent to giving one \cmd{printbibliography} command for every segment but has the additional benefit of automatically skipping segments without references. Note that \cmd{bibbysegment} starts looking for references in segment \texttt{1}. It will ignore references given outside of \env{refsegment} environments since they are assigned to segment \texttt{0}. See \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples. The options are a subset of those supported by \cmd{printbibliography}. Valid options are \opt{env}, \opt{heading}, \opt{prenote}, \opt{postnote}, \opt{maxnames}, \opt{minnames}, \opt{maxitems}, \opt{minitems}, and \opt{section}.
 
-\cmditem{bibbycategory}[key=value,\,\dots]
+\cmditem{bibbycategory}[key=value, \dots]
 
 This command loops over all bibliography categories. This is equivalent to giving one \cmd{printbibliography} command for every category but has the additional benefit of automatically skipping empty categories. The categories are processed in the order in which they were declared. See \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples. The options are a subset of those supported by \cmd{printbibliography}. Valid options are \opt{env}, \opt{prenote}, \opt{postnote}, \opt{maxnames}, \opt{minnames}, \opt{maxitems}, \opt{minitems}, and \opt{section}. Note that \opt{heading} is not available with this command. The name of the current category is automatically used as the heading name. This is equivalent to passing \texttt{heading=\prm{category}} to \cmd{printbibliography} and implies that there must be a matching heading definition for every category.
 
-\cmditem{printbibheading}[key=value,\,\dots]
+\cmditem{printbibheading}[key=value, \dots]
 
 This command prints a bibliography heading defined with \cmd{defbibheading}. It takes one optional argument, which is a list of options given in \keyval notation. The options are a small subset of those supported by \cmd{printbibliography}. Valid options are \opt{heading} and \opt{title}. By default, this command uses the heading \texttt{bibliography}. See \secref{use:bib:hdg} for details. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt,use:use:div} for usage examples.
 
@@ -2734,7 +2781,7 @@ If any entry includes a \bibfield{shorthand} field, \sty{biblatex} automatically
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
-\cmditem{printshorthands}[key=value,\,\dots]
+\cmditem{printshorthands}[key=value, \dots]
 
 This command prints the list of shorthands. It takes one optional argument, which is a list of options given in \keyval notation. Valid options are all options supported by \cmd{printbibliography} (\secref{use:bib:bib}) except \opt{prefixnumbers}, \opt{resetnumbers}, and \opt{omitnumbers}. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the list of shorthands will be local to these environments; see \secref{use:bib:sec} for details. By default, this command uses the heading \texttt{shorthands}. See \secref{use:bib:hdg} for details.
 
@@ -2749,11 +2796,11 @@ The \env{refsection} environment is used in the document body to mark a referenc
 
 \envitem{refsection}[bib files]
 
-Within a reference section all cited works are assigned labels which are local to the environment. \env{refsection} environments may not be nested, but you may use \env{refsegment} environments within a \env{refsection} to subdivide it into segments. Use the \opt{section} option of \cmd{printbibliography} to select a section when printing the bibliography and the corresponding option of \cmd{printshorthands} when printing the list of shorthands. Bibliography sections are numbered starting at~\texttt{1} and the number of the current section will be written to the transcript file. All citations given outside a \env{refsection} environment are assigned to section~\texttt{0}. If \cmd{printbibliography} is used within a \env{refsection}, it will automatically select the current section. The \opt{refsection} option is not required in this case. This also applies to \cmd{printshorthands}. If the optional argument \prm{bib files} is omitted, \sty{biblatex} uses the global list of \file{bib} files, as specified with \cmd{bibliography} in the preamble. Technically, reference sections are completely independent from document divisions such as \cmd{chapter} and \cmd{section} even though they will most likely be used per chapter or section. See the \opt{refsection} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre} for a way to automate this. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples.
+Within a reference section all cited works are assigned labels which are local to the environment. \env{refsection} environments may not be nested, but you may use \env{refsegment} environments within a \env{refsection} to subdivide it into segments. Use the \opt{section} option of \cmd{printbibliography} to select a section when printing the bibliography and the corresponding option of \cmd{printshorthands} when printing the list of shorthands. Bibliography sections are numbered starting at~\texttt{1} and the number of the current section will be written to the transcript file. All citations given outside a \env{refsection} environment are assigned to section~\texttt{0}. If \cmd{printbibliography} is used within a \env{refsection}, it will automatically select the current section. The \opt{refsection} option is not required in this case. This also applies to \cmd{printshorthands}. If the optional argument \prm{bib files} is omitted, \sty{biblatex} uses the global list of \file{bib} files, as specified with \cmd{bibliography} in the preamble. Technically, reference sections are completely independent from document divisions such as \cmd{chapter} and \cmd{section} even though they will most likely be used per chapter or section. See the \opt{refsection} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for a way to automate this. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples.
 
 \cmditem{newrefsection}[bib files]
 
-This command is similar to the \env{refsection} environment except that it is a stand"=alone command rather than an environment. It automatically ends the previous reference section (if any) and immediately starts a new one. Note that the reference section started by the last \cmd{newrefsection} command will extend to the end of the document. Use \cmd{endrefsection} if you want to terminate it earlier. Also see the \opt{refsection} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+This command is similar to the \env{refsection} environment except that it is a stand"=alone command rather than an environment. It automatically ends the previous reference section (if any) and immediately starts a new one. Note that the reference section started by the last \cmd{newrefsection} command will extend to the end of the document. Use \cmd{endrefsection} if you want to terminate it earlier. Also see the \opt{refsection} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -2766,11 +2813,11 @@ The \env{refsegment} environment is used in the document body to mark a referenc
 
 \envitem{refsegment}
 
-The difference between a \env{refsection} and a \env{refsegment} environment is that the former creates labels which are local to the environment whereas the latter provides a target for the \opt{segment} filter of \cmd{printbibliography} without affecting the labels. They will be unique across the entire document. \env{refsegment} environments may not be nested, but you may use them in conjunction with \env{refsection} to subdivide a reference section into segments. In this case, the segments are local to the enclosing \env{refsection} environment. Use the \env{refsegment} option of \cmd{printbibliography} to select a segment when printing the bibliography. The reference segments are numbered starting at~\texttt{1} and the number of the current segment will be written to the transcript file. All citations given outside a \env{refsegment} environment are assigned to segment~\texttt{0}. In contrast to the \env{refsection} environment, the current segment is not selected automatically if \cmd{printbibliography} is used within a \env{refsegment} environment. Technically, reference segments are completely independent from document divisions such as \cmd{chapter} and \cmd{section} even though they will typically be used per chapter or section. See the \opt{refsegment} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre} for a way to automate this. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples.
+The difference between a \env{refsection} and a \env{refsegment} environment is that the former creates labels which are local to the environment whereas the latter provides a target for the \opt{segment} filter of \cmd{printbibliography} without affecting the labels. They will be unique across the entire document. \env{refsegment} environments may not be nested, but you may use them in conjunction with \env{refsection} to subdivide a reference section into segments. In this case, the segments are local to the enclosing \env{refsection} environment. Use the \env{refsegment} option of \cmd{printbibliography} to select a segment when printing the bibliography. The reference segments are numbered starting at~\texttt{1} and the number of the current segment will be written to the transcript file. All citations given outside a \env{refsegment} environment are assigned to segment~\texttt{0}. In contrast to the \env{refsection} environment, the current segment is not selected automatically if \cmd{printbibliography} is used within a \env{refsegment} environment. Technically, reference segments are completely independent from document divisions such as \cmd{chapter} and \cmd{section} even though they will typically be used per chapter or section. See the \opt{refsegment} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for a way to automate this. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples.
 
 \csitem{newrefsegment}
 
-This command is similar to the \env{refsegment} environment except that it is a stand"=alone command rather than an environment. It automatically ends the previous reference segment (if any) and immediately starts a new one. Note that the reference segment started by the last \cmd{newrefsegment} command will extend to the end of the document. Use \cmd{endrefsegment} if you want to terminate it earlier. Also see the \opt{refsegment} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+This command is similar to the \env{refsegment} environment except that it is a stand"=alone command rather than an environment. It automatically ends the previous reference segment (if any) and immediately starts a new one. Note that the reference segment started by the last \cmd{newrefsegment} command will extend to the end of the document. Use \cmd{endrefsegment} if you want to terminate it earlier. Also see the \opt{refsegment} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -2831,7 +2878,7 @@ The following headings, which are intended for use with \cmd{printbibliography}
 \begin{valuelist*}
 
 \item[bibliography]
-This is the default heading used by \cmd{printbibliography} if the \opt{heading} option is not given. Its default definition depends on the document class. If the class provides a \cmd{chapter} command, the heading is similar to the bibliography heading of the standard \latex \texttt{book} class, \ie it uses \cmd{chapter*} to create an unnumbered chapter heading which is not included in the table of contents. If there is no \cmd{chapter} command, it is similar to the bibliography heading of the standard \latex \texttt{article} class, \ie it uses \cmd{section*} to create an unnumbered section heading which is not included in the table of contents. The string used in the heading also depends on the document class. With \texttt{book}-like classes the bibliography string \texttt{bibliography} is used, with other classes it is \texttt{references} (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). See also \secref{use:cav:scr, use:cav:mem} for class-specific hints.
+This is the default heading used by \cmd{printbibliography} if the \opt{heading} option is not given. Its default definition depends on the document class. If the class provides a \cmd{chapter} command, the heading is similar to the bibliography heading of the standard \latex \texttt{book} class, \ie it uses \cmd{chapter*} to create an unnumbered chapter heading which is not included in the table of contents. If there is no \cmd{chapter} command, it is similar to the bibliography heading of the standard \latex \texttt{article} class, \ie it uses \cmd{section*} to create an unnumbered section heading which is not included in the table of contents. The string used in the heading also depends on the document class. With \texttt{book}-like classes the localization string \texttt{bibliography} is used, with other classes it is \texttt{references} (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). See also \secref{use:cav:scr, use:cav:mem} for class-specific hints.
 
 \item[subbibliography]
 Similar to \texttt{bibliography} but one sectioning level lower. This heading definition uses \cmd{section*} instead of \cmd{chapter*} with a \texttt{book}-like class and \cmd{subsection*} instead of \cmd{section*} otherwise.
@@ -2855,7 +2902,7 @@ The following headings intended for use with \cmd{printshorthands} are predefine
 \begin{valuelist*}
 
 \item[shorthands]
-This is the default heading used by \cmd{printshorthands} if the \opt{heading} option is not given. It is similar to \texttt{bibliography} above except that it uses the bibliography string \texttt{shorthands} instead of \texttt{bibliography} or \texttt{references} (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). See also \secref{use:cav:scr, use:cav:mem} for class-specific hints.
+This is the default heading used by \cmd{printshorthands} if the \opt{heading} option is not given. It is similar to \texttt{bibliography} above except that it uses the localization string \texttt{shorthands} instead of \texttt{bibliography} or \texttt{references} (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). See also \secref{use:cav:scr, use:cav:mem} for class-specific hints.
 
 \item[losintoc]
 Similar to \texttt{shorthands} above but adds an entry to the table of contents.
@@ -2868,30 +2915,26 @@ Similar to \texttt{shorthands} above but uses \cmd{chapter} or \cmd{section} to
 \subsubsection{Bibliography Notes}
 \label{use:bib:nts}
 
-The following command defines the note \prm{name}, to be used via the \opt{prenote} and \opt{postnote} options of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{printshorthands}:
-
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \cmditem{defbibnote}{name}{text}
 
-The \prm{text} may be any arbitrary piece of text, possibly spanning several paragraphs and containing font declarations. Also see \secref{use:cav:act}.
+Defines the bibliography note \prm{name}, to be used via the \opt{prenote} and \opt{postnote} options of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{printshorthands}. The \prm{text} may be any arbitrary piece of text, possibly spanning several paragraphs and containing font declarations. Also see \secref{use:cav:act}.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
-\subsubsection{Bibliography Filters}
+\subsubsection{Bibliography Filters and Checks}
 \label{use:bib:flt}
 
-The following command defines the custom filter \prm{name}, to be used via the \opt{filter} option of \cmd{printbibliography}:
-
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \cmditem{defbibfilter}{name}{expression}
 
-The \prm{expression} is a complex test based on the logical operators \texttt{and}, \texttt{or}, \texttt{not}, the group separator \texttt{(...)}, and the following atomic tests:
+Defines the custom bibliography filter \prm{name}, to be used via the \opt{filter} option of \cmd{printbibliography}. The \prm{expression} is a complex test based on the logical operators \texttt{and}, \texttt{or}, \texttt{not}, the group separator \texttt{(...)}, and the following atomic tests:
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
-\begin{optionlist}
+\begin{optionlist*}
 
 \valitem{segment}{integer}
 
@@ -2913,7 +2956,7 @@ Matches all entries whose \bibfield{keywords} field includes \prm{keyword}. If t
 
 Matches all entries assigned to \prm{category} with \cmd{addtocategory}.
 
-\end{optionlist}
+\end{optionlist*}
 
 Here is an example of a filter expression:
 
@@ -2937,6 +2980,47 @@ This filter will match all entries whose entry type is either \bibtype{book} or
 %
 Note that custom filters are local to the reference section in which they are used. Use the \texttt{section} filter of \cmd{printbibliography} to select a different section. This is not possible from within a custom filter.
 
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+
+\cmditem{defbibcheck}{name}{code}
+
+Defines the custom bibliography filter \prm{name}, to be used via the \opt{check} option of \cmd{printbibliography}. \cmd{defbibcheck} is similar in concept to \cmd{defbibfilter} but much more low-level. Rather than a high-level expression, the \prm{code} is \latex code, much like the code used in driver definitions, which may perform arbitrary tests to decide whether or not a given entry is to be printed. The bibliographic data of the respective entry is available when the \prm{code} is executed. Issuing the command \cmd{skipentry} in the \prm{code} will cause the current entry to be skipped. For example, the following filter will only output entries with an \bibfield{abstract} field:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\defbibcheck{<<abstract>>}{%
+  \iffieldundef{abstract}{<<\skipentry>>}{}}
+...
+\printbibliography[<<check=abstract>>]
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+The following check will exclude all entries published before the year 2000:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\defbibcheck{recent}{%
+  \iffieldint{year}
+    {\ifnumless{\thefield{year}}{2000}
+       {\skipentry}
+       {}}
+    {\skipentry}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+See the author guide, in particular \secref{aut:aux:tst,aut:aux:ife}, for further details.
+
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
+\subsubsection{Dynamic Entry Sets}
+\label{use:bib:set}
+
+In addition to the \bibtype{set} entry type, \sty{biblatex} also supports dynamic entry sets defined on a per-document\slash per-refsection basis. The following command, which may be used in the dcument preamble or the document body, defines the set \prm{key}:
+
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+
+\cmditem{defbibentryset}{key}{key1,key2,key3, \dots}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+The \prm{key} is the entry key of the set, which is used like any other entry key when referring to the set. The \prm{key} must be unique and it must not conflict with any other entry key. The second argument is a comma"=separated list of the entry keys which make up the set. \cmd{defbibentryset} implies the equivalent of a \cmd{nocite} command, \ie all sets which are declared are also added to the bibliography. When declaring the same set more than once, only the first invocation of \cmd{defbibentryset} will define the set. Subsequent definitions of the same \prm{key} are ignored and work like \cmd{nocite}\prm{key}. Dynamic entry sets defined in the document body are local to the enclosing \env{refsection} environment, if any. Otherwise, they are assigned to reference section~0. Those defined in the preamble are assigned to reference section~0. Note that dynamic entry sets require Biber. They will not work with any other backend. See \secref{use:use:set} for further details.
+
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
 \subsubsection{Legacy Commands}
 
 In standard \latex, the following command selects the \file{bst} file to be used by \bibtex.
@@ -2958,7 +3042,7 @@ All citation commands generally take one mandatory and two optional arguments. T
 
 \cmditem*{command}[prenote][postnote]{keys}<punctuation>
 
-If the \opt{autopunct} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre} is enabled, they will scan ahead for any \prm{punctuation} immediately following their last argument. This is useful to avoid spurious punctuation marks after citations. This feature is configured with \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation}, see \secref{aut:pct:cfg} for details.
+If the \opt{autopunct} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} is enabled, they will scan ahead for any \prm{punctuation} immediately following their last argument. This is useful to avoid spurious punctuation marks after citations. This feature is configured with \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation}, see \secref{aut:pct:cfg} for details.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3075,7 +3159,7 @@ The multicite version of \cmd{supercite}. This command is only provided by the n
 \subsubsection{Style-independent Commands}
 \label{use:cit:aut}
 
-Sometimes it is desirable to give the citations in the source file in a format that is not tied to a specific citation style and can be modified globally in the preamble. The format of the citations is easily changed by loading a different citation style. However, when using commands such as \cmd{parencite} or \cmd{footcite}, the way the citations are integrated with the text is still effectively hard"=coded. The idea behind the \cmd{autocite} command is to provide higher"=level citation markup which makes global switching from inline citations to citations given in footnotes (or as superscripts) possible. The \cmd{autocite} command is built on top of backend commands like \cmd{parencite} and \cmd{footcite}. The citation style provides an \cmd{autocite} definition with \cmd{DeclareAutoCiteCommand} (see \secref{aut:cbx:cbx}). This definition may be activated with the \opt{autocite} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre}. The citation style will usually initialize this package option to a value which is suitable for the style, see \secref{use:xbx:cbx} for details. Note that there are certain limits to high"=level citation markup. For example, inline author-year citation schemes often integrate citations so tightly with the text that it is virtually impossible to automatically convert them to footnotes. The \cmd{autocite} command is only applicable in cases in which you would normally use \cmd{parencite} or \cmd{footcite} (or \cmd{supercite}, with a numeric style). The citations should be given at the end of a sentence or a partial sentence, immediately preceding the terminal punctuation mark, and they should not be a part of the sentence in a grammatical sense (like \cmd{textcite}, for example).
+Sometimes it is desirable to give the citations in the source file in a format that is not tied to a specific citation style and can be modified globally in the preamble. The format of the citations is easily changed by loading a different citation style. However, when using commands such as \cmd{parencite} or \cmd{footcite}, the way the citations are integrated with the text is still effectively hard"=coded. The idea behind the \cmd{autocite} command is to provide higher"=level citation markup which makes global switching from inline citations to citations given in footnotes (or as superscripts) possible. The \cmd{autocite} command is built on top of backend commands like \cmd{parencite} and \cmd{footcite}. The citation style provides an \cmd{autocite} definition with \cmd{DeclareAutoCiteCommand} (see \secref{aut:cbx:cbx}). This definition may be activated with the \opt{autocite} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The citation style will usually initialize this package option to a value which is suitable for the style, see \secref{use:xbx:cbx} for details. Note that there are certain limits to high"=level citation markup. For example, inline author-year citation schemes often integrate citations so tightly with the text that it is virtually impossible to automatically convert them to footnotes. The \cmd{autocite} command is only applicable in cases in which you would normally use \cmd{parencite} or \cmd{footcite} (or \cmd{supercite}, with a numeric style). The citations should be given at the end of a sentence or a partial sentence, immediately preceding the terminal punctuation mark, and they should not be a part of the sentence in a grammatical sense (like \cmd{textcite}, for example).
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3099,14 +3183,15 @@ This is the multicite version of \cmd{autocite}. It also detects and moves punct
 \subsubsection{Text Commands}
 \label{use:cit:txt}
 
-The following commands are provided by the core of \sty{biblatex}. They are intended for use in the flow of text. Note that all text commands are exluded from citation tracking.
+The following commands are provided by the core of \sty{biblatex}. They are intended for use in the flow of text. Note that all text commands are excluded from citation tracking.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \cmditem{citeauthor}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 \cmditem{Citeauthor}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 
-These commands print the authors. If there is no \bibfield{author} field, they print the \bibfield{editor} instead. \cmd{Citeauthor} is similar to \cmd{citeauthor} but capitalizes the name prefix of the first name in the citation if the \opt{useprefix} option is enabled, provided that there is a name prefix.
+These commands print the authors. Strictly speaking, it prints the \bibfield{labelname} list, which may be the
+\bibfield{author}, the \bibfield{editor}, or the \bibfield{translator}. \cmd{Citeauthor} is similar to \cmd{citeauthor} but capitalizes the name prefix of the first name in the citation if the \opt{useprefix} option is enabled, provided that there is a name prefix.
 
 \cmditem{citetitle}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 \cmditem*{citetitle*}[prenote][postnote]{key}
@@ -3115,7 +3200,11 @@ This command prints the title. It will use the abridged title in the \bibfield{s
 
 \cmditem{citeyear}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 
-This command prints the \bibfield{year} field.
+This command prints the year (\bibfield{year} field or year component of \bibfield{date}).
+
+\cmditem{citedate}[prenote][postnote]{key}
+
+This command prints the full date (\bibfield{date} or \bibfield{year}).
 
 \cmditem{citeurl}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 
@@ -3139,8 +3228,9 @@ The following special commands are also provided by the core of \sty{biblatex}.
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \cmditem{nocite}{key}
+\cmditem*{nocite}|\{*\}|
 
-This command is similar to the standard \latex \cmd{nocite} command. It adds the \prm{key} to the bibliography. If the \prm{key} is an asterisk, all entries available in the \file{bib} file are added to the bibliography. In either case, no citation is printed.
+This command is similar to the standard \latex \cmd{nocite} command. It adds the \prm{key} to the bibliography without printing a citation. If the \prm{key} is an asterisk, all entries available in the \file{bib} file are added to the bibliography. Like all other citation commands, \cmd{nocite} commands in the document body are local to the enclosing \env{refsection} environment, if any. In contrast to standard \latex, \cmd{nocite} may also be used in the document preamble. In this case, the references are assigned to reference section~0.
 
 \cmditem{fullcite}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 
@@ -3221,7 +3311,7 @@ The commands in this section are little helpers related to citations.
 
 \csitem{citereset}
 
-This command resets the citation style. This may be useful if the style replaces repeated citations with abbreviations like \emph{ibidem}, \emph{idem}, \emph{op. cit.}, etc. and you want to force a full citation at the beginning of a new chapter, section, or some other location. The command executes a style specific initialization hook defined with the \cmd{InitializeCitationStyle} command from \secref{aut:cbx:cbx}. It also resets the internal citation trackers of this package. The reset will affect the \cmd{ifciteseen}, \cmd{ifentryseen}, \cmd{ifciteibid}, and \cmd{ifciteidem} tests discussed in \secref{aut:aux:tst}. When used inside a \env{refsection} environment, the reset of the citation tracker is local to the current \env{refsection} environment. Also see the \opt{citereset} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+This command resets the citation style. This may be useful if the style replaces repeated citations with abbreviations like \emph{ibidem}, \emph{idem}, \emph{op. cit.}, etc. and you want to force a full citation at the beginning of a new chapter, section, or some other location. The command executes a style specific initialization hook defined with the \cmd{InitializeCitationStyle} command from \secref{aut:cbx:cbx}. It also resets the internal citation trackers of this package. The reset will affect the \cmd{ifciteseen}, \cmd{ifentryseen}, \cmd{ifciteibid}, and \cmd{ifciteidem} tests discussed in \secref{aut:aux:tst}. When used inside a \env{refsection} environment, the reset of the citation tracker is local to the current \env{refsection} environment. Also see the \opt{citereset} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \csitem{citereset*}
 
@@ -3245,11 +3335,11 @@ Similar to \cmd{pno} but suppresses all prefixes. See \secref{use:cav:pag} for f
 
 \csitem{psq}
 
-In the \prm{postnote} argument to a citation command, this command indicates a range of two pages where only the starting page is given. See \secref{use:cav:pag} for further details and usage instructions. The suffix printed is the bibliography string \texttt{sequens}, see \secref{aut:lng:key}. The spacing inserted between the suffix and the page number may be modified by redefining the macro \cmd{sqspace}. The default is an unbreakable interword space. Note that this command is only available locally in citations and the bibliography.
+In the \prm{postnote} argument to a citation command, this command indicates a range of two pages where only the starting page is given. See \secref{use:cav:pag} for further details and usage instructions. The suffix printed is the localization string \texttt{sequens}, see \secref{aut:lng:key}. The spacing inserted between the suffix and the page number may be modified by redefining the macro \cmd{sqspace}. The default is an unbreakable interword space. Note that this command is only available locally in citations and the bibliography.
 
 \csitem{psqq}
 
-Similar to \cmd{psq} but indicates an open-ended page range. See \secref{use:cav:pag} for further details and usage instructions. The suffix printed is the bibliography string \texttt{sequentes}, see \secref{aut:lng:key}. This command is only available locally in citations and the bibliography.
+Similar to \cmd{psq} but indicates an open-ended page range. See \secref{use:cav:pag} for further details and usage instructions. The suffix printed is the localization string \texttt{sequentes}, see \secref{aut:lng:key}. This command is only available locally in citations and the bibliography.
 
 \cmditem{RN}{integer}
 
@@ -3261,10 +3351,97 @@ Similar to \cmd{RN} but prints a lowercase Roman numeral. The formatting applied
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
-\subsubsection{Compatibility Commands for \sty{natbib}}
+\subsubsection{\sty{natbib} Compatibility Commands}
 \label{use:cit:nat}
 
-If the \opt{natbib} package option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} will load a \sty{natbib} compatibility style in addition to the main citation style. The compatibility style defines aliases for the citation commands provided by the \sty{natbib} package, version~7. This includes aliases for the core citation commands \cmd{citet} and \cmd{citep} as well as the variants \cmd{citealt} and \cmd{citealp}. The starred variants of these commands, which print the full author list, are also supported. The \cmd{cite} command, which is handled in a particular way by \sty{natbib}, is not treated in a special way. The text commands (\cmd{citeauthor}, \cmd{citeyear}, etc.) are also supported, as are all commands which capitalize the name prefix (\cmd{Citet}, \cmd{Citep}, \cmd{Citeauthor}, etc.). Aliasing with \cmd{defcitealias}, \cmd{citetalias}, and \cmd{citepalias} is possible as well. Note that the compatibility commands will not emulate the citation format of the \sty{natbib} package. They merely map \sty{natbib}'s commands to functionally equivalent facilities of the \sty{biblatex} package. The citation format depends on the main citation style. However, the compatibility style will adapt \cmd{nameyeardelim} to match the default style of the \sty{natbib} package.
+The \opt{natbib} package option loads a \sty{natbib} compatibility module. The module defines aliases for the citation commands provided by the \sty{natbib} package. This includes aliases for the core citation commands \cmd{citet} and \cmd{citep} as well as the variants \cmd{citealt} and \cmd{citealp}. The starred variants of these commands, which print the full author list, are also supported. The \cmd{cite} command, which is handled in a particular way by \sty{natbib}, is not treated in a special way. The text commands (\cmd{citeauthor}, \cmd{citeyear}, etc.) are also supported, as are all commands which capitalize the name prefix (\cmd{Citet}, \cmd{Citep}, \cmd{Citeauthor}, etc.). Aliasing with \cmd{defcitealias}, \cmd{citetalias}, and \cmd{citepalias} is possible as well. Note that the compatibility commands will not emulate the citation format of the \sty{natbib} package. They merely alias \sty{natbib}'s commands to functionally equivalent facilities of the \sty{biblatex} package. The citation format depends on the main citation style. However, the compatibility style will adapt \cmd{nameyeardelim} to match the default style of the \sty{natbib} package.
+
+\subsubsection[\sty{mcite}-like Citation Commands]{\sty{mcite}-like Citation Commands\BiberOnlyMark}
+\label{use:cit:mct}
+
+The \opt{mcite} package option loads a special citation module which provides \sty{mcite}\slash \sty{mciteplus}-like citation commands. Strictly speaking, what the module provides are wrappers for the commands of the main citation style. For example, the following command:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\mcite{key1,setA,*keyA1,*keyA2,*keyA3,key2,setB,*keyB1,*keyB2,*keyB3}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+is essentially equivalent to this:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\defbibentryset{setA}{keyA1,keyA2,keyA3}%
+\defbibentryset{setB}{keyB1,keyB2,keyB3}%
+\cite{key1,setA,key2,setB}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+The \cmd{mcite} command will work with any style since the \cmd{cite} backend command is controlled by the main citation style as usual. The \texttt{mcite} module provides wrappers for the standard commands in \secref{use:cit:std,use:cit:cbx}. See \tabref{use:cit:mct:tab2} for an overview. Pre and postnotes as well as starred variants of all commands are also supported. The parameters will be passed to the backend command. For example:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\mcite*[pre][post]{setA,*keyA1,*keyA2,*keyA3}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+will execute:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\defbibentryset{setA}{keyA1,keyA2,keyA3}%
+\cite*[pre][post]{setA}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+Note that the \texttt{mcite} module is not a compatibility module. It provides commands which are very similar but not identical in syntax and function to \sty{mcite}'s commands. When migrating from \sty{mcite}\slash\sty{mciteplus} to \sty{biblatex}, legacy files must be updated. With \sty{mcite}, the first member of the citation group is also the identifier of the group as a whole. Borrowing an example from the \sty{mcite} manual, this group:
+
+\begin{table}
+\tablesetup
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{@{}p{0.5\linewidth}@{}p{0.5\linewidth}@{}}
+\toprule
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{Standard Command} &
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{\sty{mcite}-like Command} \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule{2-2}
+|\cite|		& |\mcite| \\
+|\Cite|		& |\Mcite| \\
+|\parencite|	& |\mparencite| \\
+|\Parencite|	& |\Mparencite| \\
+|\footcite|	& |\mfootcite| \\
+|\footcitetext|	& |\mfootcitetext| \\
+|\textcite|	& |\mtextcite| \\
+|\Textcite|	& |\Mtextcite| \\
+|\supercite|	& |\msupercite| \\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabular*}
+\caption{\sty{mcite}-like commands}
+\label{use:cit:mct:tab1}
+\end{table}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\cite{<<glashow>>,*salam,*weinberg}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+consists of three entries and the entry key of the first one also serves as identifier of the entire group. In contrast to that, a \sty{biblatex} entry set is an entity in its own right. Therefore, it requires a unique entry key which is assigned to the set as it is defined:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\mcite{<<set1>>,*glashow,*salam,*weinberg}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+Once defined, an entry set is handled like any regular entry in a \file{bib} file. When using one of the \texttt{numeric} styles which ship with \texttt{biblatex} and activating its \opt{subentry} option, it is even possible to refer to set members. See \tabref{use:cit:mct:tab2} for some examples. Restating the original definition of the set is redundant, but permissible. In contrast to \sty{mciteplus}, however, restating a part of the original definition is invalid. Use the entry key of the set instead.
+
+\begin{table}
+\tablesetup
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{@{}p{0.5\linewidth}@{}>{\ttfamily}p{0.15\linewidth}@{}p{0.35\linewidth}@{}}
+\toprule
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{Input} &
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{Output} &
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}H}{Comment} \\
+\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(r){2-2}\cmidrule{3-3}
+|\mcite{set1,*glashow,*salam,*weinberg}|& [1]	& Defining and citing the set \\
+|\mcite{set1}|				& [1]	& Subsequent citation of the set \\
+|\cite{set1}|				& [1]	& Regular |\cite| works as usual \\
+|\mcite{set1,*glashow,*salam,*weinberg}|& [1]	& Redundant, but permissible \\
+|\mcite{glashow}|			& [1a]	& Citing a set member \\
+|\cite{weinberg}|			& [1c]	& Regular |\cite| works as well \\
+\bottomrule
+\end{tabular*}
+\caption[\sty{mcite}-like syntax]
+{\sty{mcite}-like syntax (sample output with \kvopt{style}{numeric} and \opt{subentry} option)}
+\label{use:cit:mct:tab2}
+\end{table}
 
 \subsection{Localization Commands}
 \label{use:lng}
@@ -3275,7 +3452,7 @@ The \sty{biblatex} package provides translations for key terms such as <edition>
 
 \cmditem{DefineBibliographyStrings}{language}{definitions}
 
-This command is used to define bibliography strings. The \prm{language} must be a language name known to the \sty{babel} package, \ie one of the identifiers listed in \tabref{bib:fld:tab1} on page \pageref{bib:fld:tab1}. The \prm{definitions} are \keyval pairs which assign an expression to an identifier:
+This command is used to define localization strings. The \prm{language} must be a language name known to the \sty{babel} package, \ie one of the identifiers listed in \tabref{bib:fld:tab1} on page \pageref{bib:fld:tab1}. The \prm{definitions} are \keyval pairs which assign an expression to an identifier:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DefineBibliographyStrings{american}{%
@@ -3309,7 +3486,7 @@ The \prm{language} must be a language name known to the \sty{babel} package. The
 
 \cmditem{NewBibliographyString}{key}
 
-This command declares new bibliography strings, \ie it initializes a new \prm{key} to be used in the
+This command declares new localization strings, \ie it initializes a new \prm{key} to be used in the
 \prm{definitions} of \cmd{DefineBibliographyStrings}. The \prm{key} argument may also be a comma"=separated
 list of key names. The keys listed in \secref{aut:lng:key} are defined by default.
 
@@ -3323,7 +3500,7 @@ The commands and facilities presented in this section may be used to adapt the f
 \subsubsection{Generic Commands and Hooks}
 \label{use:fmt:fmt}
 
-The commands in this section may be redefined with \cmd{renewcommand} in the document preamble. Note that all commands starting with \cmd{mk\dots} take one argument. All of these commands are defined in \path{biblatex.def} to make it easier to look up the defaults.
+The commands in this section may be redefined with \cmd{renewcommand} in the document preamble. Note that all commands starting with \cmd{mk\dots} take one argument. All of these commands are defined in \path{biblatex.def}.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3341,7 +3518,7 @@ Arbitrary code to be executed at the beginning of each citation command.
 
 \csitem{newblockpunct}
 
-The separator inserted between <blocks> in the sense explained in \secref{aut:pct:new}. The default definition is controlled by the package option \opt{block} (see \secref{use:opt:pre}).
+The separator inserted between <blocks> in the sense explained in \secref{aut:pct:new}. The default definition is controlled by the package option \opt{block} (see \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}).
 
 \csitem{newunitpunct}
 
@@ -3402,7 +3579,7 @@ In this example, the comma after <Edward> is the \cmd{revsdnamedelim} whereas th
 
 \csitem{andothersdelim}
 
-The delimiter printed before the bibliography string <\texttt{andothers}> if a name list like \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor} is truncated. The default is an interword space.
+The delimiter printed before the localization string <\texttt{andothers}> if a name list like \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor} is truncated. The default is an interword space.
 
 \csitem{multilistdelim}
 
@@ -3414,7 +3591,7 @@ The delimiter printed instead of \cmd{multilistdelim} before the final item in a
 
 \csitem{andmoredelim}
 
-The delimiter printed before the bibliography string <\texttt{andmore}> if a literal list like \bibfield{publisher} or \bibfield{location} is truncated. The default is an interword space.
+The delimiter printed before the localization string <\texttt{andmore}> if a literal list like \bibfield{publisher} or \bibfield{location} is truncated. The default is an interword space.
 
 \csitem{multicitedelim}
 
@@ -3440,6 +3617,17 @@ The delimiter printed between the author\slash editor and the year by author-yea
 
 A string to be appended to the non"=numeric portion of the \bibfield{labelalpha} field (\ie the field holding the citation label used by alphabetic citation styles) if the number of authors\slash editors exceeds the \opt{maxnames} threshold or the \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor} list was truncated in the \file{bib} file with the keyword <\texttt{and others}>. This will typically be a single character such as a plus sign or an asterisk. The default is a plus sign. This command may also be redefined to an empty string to disable this feature. In any case, it must be redefined in the preamble.
 
+\csitem{sortalphaothers}
+
+\BiberOnlyMark Similar to \cmd{labelalphaothers} but used in the sorting process. Setting it to a different value is advisable if the latter contains formatting commands, for example:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\renewcommand*{\labelalphaothers}{\textbf{+}}
+\renewcommand*{\sortalphaothers}{+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+If \cmd{sortalphaothers} is not redefined, it defaults to \cmd{labelalphaothers}.
+
 \csitem{prenotedelim}
 
 The delimiter printed after the \prm{prenote} argument of a citation command. See \secref{use:cit} for details. The default is an interword space.
@@ -3554,7 +3742,7 @@ The vertical space between paragraphs within an entry in the bibliography. The d
 
 \cntitem{abbrvpenalty}
 
-This counter, which is used by the localization modules, holds the penalty used in short or abbreviated bibliography strings. For example, a linebreak in expressions such as «et al.» or «ed. by» is unfortunate, but should still be possible to prevent overfull boxes. This counter is initialized to \cmd{hyphenpenalty} at load-time. The idea is making \tex treat the whole expression as if it were a single, hyphenatable word as far as line"=breaking is concerned. If you dislike such linebreaks, use a higher value. If you do not mind them at all, set this counter to zero. If you want to suppress them unconditionally, set it to <infinite> (10\,000 or higher).\footnote{The default values assigned to \cnt{abbrvpenalty}, \cnt{lownamepenalty}, and \cnt{highnamepenalty} are deliberately very low to prevent overfull boxes. This implies that you will hardly notice any effect on line-breaking if the text is set justified. If you set these counters to 10\,000 to suppress the respective breakpoints, you will notice their effect but you may also be confronted with overfull boxes. Keep in mind that line-breaking in the bibliography is often more difficult than in the body text and that you can not resort to rephrasing a sentence. In some cases it may be preferable to set the entire bibliography \cmd{raggedright} to prevent suboptimal linebreaks. In this case, even the fairly low default penalties will make a visible difference.}
+This counter, which is used by the localization modules, holds the penalty used in short or abbreviated localization strings. For example, a linebreak in expressions such as «et al.» or «ed. by» is unfortunate, but should still be possible to prevent overfull boxes. This counter is initialized to \cmd{hyphenpenalty} at load-time. The idea is making \tex treat the whole expression as if it were a single, hyphenatable word as far as line"=breaking is concerned. If you dislike such linebreaks, use a higher value. If you do not mind them at all, set this counter to zero. If you want to suppress them unconditionally, set it to <infinite> (10\,000 or higher).\footnote{The default values assigned to \cnt{abbrvpenalty}, \cnt{lownamepenalty}, and \cnt{highnamepenalty} are deliberately very low to prevent overfull boxes. This implies that you will hardly notice any effect on line-breaking if the text is set justified. If you set these counters to 10\,000 to suppress the respective breakpoints, you will notice their effect but you may also be confronted with overfull boxes. Keep in mind that line-breaking in the bibliography is often more difficult than in the body text and that you can not resort to rephrasing a sentence. In some cases it may be preferable to set the entire bibliography \cmd{raggedright} to prevent suboptimal linebreaks. In this case, even the fairly low default penalties will make a visible difference.}
 
 \cntitem{highnamepenalty}
 
@@ -3611,7 +3799,7 @@ Generic command which typesets an acronym using the small caps variant of the cu
 
 \cmditem{autocap}{character}
 
-Automatically converts the \prm{character} to its uppercase form if \sty{biblatex}'s punctuation tracker would capitalize a bibliography string at the current location. This command is robust. It is useful for conditional capitalization of certain strings in an entry. Note that the \prm{character} argument is a single character given in lowercase. For example:
+Automatically converts the \prm{character} to its uppercase form if \sty{biblatex}'s punctuation tracker would capitalize a localization string at the current location. This command is robust. It is useful for conditional capitalization of certain strings in an entry. Note that the \prm{character} argument is a single character given in lowercase. For example:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \autocap{s}pecial issue
@@ -3656,7 +3844,7 @@ It is highly advisable to always specify \texttt{american}, \texttt{british}, \t
 \subsubsection{Spanish}
 \label{use:loc:esp}
 
-Handling the word <and> is more difficult in Spanish than in the other languages supported by this package because it may be <y> or <e>, depending on the initial sound of the following word. Therefore, the Spanish localization module does not use the bibliography string <\texttt{and}> but a special internal <smart and> command. The behavior of this command is controlled by the \cnt{smartand} counter.
+Handling the word <and> is more difficult in Spanish than in the other languages supported by this package because it may be <y> or <e>, depending on the initial sound of the following word. Therefore, the Spanish localization module does not use the localization string <\texttt{and}> but a special internal <smart and> command. The behavior of this command is controlled by the \cnt{smartand} counter.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3952,29 +4140,24 @@ It is still a good idea to declare all categories used in the bibliography expli
 %
 The handling of the headings is different from \cmd{bibbysection} and \cmd{bibbysegment} in this case. \cmd{bibbycategory} uses the name of the current category as a heading name. This is equivalent to passing \texttt{heading=\prm{category}} to \cmd{printbibliography} and implies that you need to provide a matching heading for every category.
 
-\subsubsection{Reference Sets}
+\subsubsection{Entry Sets}
 \label{use:use:set}
 
-A reference set is a group of entries which are cited as a single reference and listed as a single item in the bibliography. Using an example borrowed from the \sty{mcite} manual, the following three references
+An entry set is a group of entries which are cited as a single reference and listed as a single item in the bibliography. The \sty{biblatex} package supports two types of entry sets. Static entry sets are defined in the \file{bib} file like any other entry. Dynamic entry sets are defined with \cmd{defbibentryset} (\secref{use:bib:set}) on a per-document\slash per-refsection basis in the document preamble or the document body. This section deals with the definition of entry sets; style authors should also see \secref{aut:cav:set} for further information.
 
-\begin{enumerate}
-\renewcommand*\labelenumi{[\theenumi]}
-\addtolength{\leftskip}{0.5em}
-\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}
-\item Sheldon Glashow. \emph{Partial Symmetries of Weak Interactions.} In: \emph{Nucl.~Phys.} 22 (1961), pp. 579 sqq.
-\item Abdus Salam. \emph{Weak and Electromagnetic Interactions.} In: \emph{Elementary particle theory}. \emph{Relativistic groups and analyticity}. Proceedings of the Eighth Nobel Symposium, May 19--25, 1968. Ed. by Nils Svartholm. Stockholm: Almquist \& Wiksell, 1968, pp. 367 sqq.
-\item Steven Weinberg. \emph{A Model of Leptons.} In: \emph{Phys.~Rev.~Lett.} 19 (1967), pp. 1264 sqq.
-\end{enumerate}
+\paragraph{Static entry sets}
 
-would be concatenated into a single reference as follows:
+\BiberOnlyMark Static entry sets are defined in the \file{bib} file like any other entry. When using Biber as backend, defining an entry set is as simple as adding an entry of type \bibtype{set}. The entry has an \bibfield{entryset} field defining the members of the set as a comma"=separated list of entry keys:
 
-\begin{enumerate}
-\renewcommand*\labelenumi{[\theenumi]}
-\addtolength{\leftskip}{0.5em}
-\item Sheldon Glashow. \emph{Partial Symmetries of Weak Interactions.} In: \emph{Nucl.~Phys.} 22 (1961), pp. 579 sqq.; Abdus Salam. \emph{Weak and Electromagnetic Interactions.} In: \emph{Elementary particle theory}. \emph{Relativistic groups and analyticity}. Proceedings of the Eighth Nobel Symposium, May 19--25, 1968. Ed. by Nils Svartholm. Stockholm: Almquist \& Wiksell, 1968, pp. 367 sqq.; Steven Weinberg. \emph{A Model of Leptons.} In: \emph{Phys.~Rev.~Lett.} 19 (1967), pp. 1264 sqq.
-\end{enumerate}
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
+<<@Set>>{<<set1>>,
+  <<entryset>> = {<<key1,key2,key3>>},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+Entries may be part of a set in one document\slash refsection and stand-alone references in another one, depending on the presence of the \bibtype{set} entry. If the \bibtype{set} entry is cited, the set members are grouped automatically. If not, they will work like any regular entry.
 
-Reference sets are defined in the \file{bib} file, essentially like any other entry. They require the \bibfield{entryset} and \bibfield{crossref} fields to be used in a particular way. The entries which make up the set are given as a comma-separated list of entry keys in the \bibfield{entryset} field of the parent entry. The remaining data of the \bibtype{set} entry must be identical to the data of the first item in the set. The easiest way to accomplish that is to use a \bibfield{crossref} field which points to the first key listed in the \bibfield{entrykey} field. The \bibfield{entryset} fields of the child entries are reverse pointers to the entry key of the parent. Here is an example of a reference set consisting of three items:
+When using \bibtex, which has no native support for entry sets, setting up entry sets involves more work. \bibtex requires \bibfield{entryset} and \bibfield{crossref} fields to be used in a special way. The members of the set are given in the \bibfield{entryset} field of the \bibtype{set} entry. The \bibtype{set} entry also requires a \bibfield{crossref} field which points to the first key in the \bibfield{entryset} field. In addition to that, all members of the set require \bibfield{entryset} fields which are reverse pointers to the entry key of the \bibtype{set} head entry:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 @Set{set1,
@@ -3987,7 +4170,7 @@ Reference sets are defined in the \file{bib} file, essentially like any other en
   title    = {...},
   ...
 }
-@Article{key2,
+@InCollection{key2,
   <<entryset>> = {set1},
   author   = {...},
   title    = {...},
@@ -4001,26 +4184,17 @@ Reference sets are defined in the \file{bib} file, essentially like any other en
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-If you want to refer to an item as part of a set in one document and as a stand-alone reference in a different one (or in a different reference section of the same document), you need two distinct entries. You may use \bibfield{crossref} fields to avoid duplicating all the data but keep in mind that \bibtex does not support cascading cross-references and that \bibfield{entryset} fields will be inherited with the rest of the data as \bibtex copies the data of the cross-referenced parent entry. To avoid that, use an empty \opt{entryset} field in the entry serving as a stand-alone reference. The setup boils down to this:
+Note that citing any set member will automatically load the entire set with \bibtex. If you want to refer to an item as part of a set in one document\slash refsection and as a stand-alone reference in another one, you need two distinct entries with.
+
+\paragraph[Dynamic entry sets]{Dynamic entry sets\BiberOnlyMark}
+
+Dynamic entry sets are set up and work much like static ones. The main difference is that they are defined in the document preamble or on the fly in the document body using the \cmd{defbibentryset} command from \secref{use:bib:set}:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
-@Set{<<set1>>,
-  <<entryset>> = {subkey1,...},
-  <<crossref>> = {<<subkey1>>},
-}
-@Article{<<key1>>,
-  <<entryset>> = <<{}>>,
-  <<crossref>> = {<<subkey1>>},
-}
-@Article{subkey1,
-  <<entryset>> = {set1},
-  author   = {...},
-  title    = {...},
-  ...
-}
+\defbibentryset{set1}{key1,key2,key3}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-In the above example, use the key <\texttt{set1}> when citing the entire reference set (including \texttt{subkey1}) and <\texttt{key1}> when citing the article as a stand-alone reference. Style authors should also see \secref{aut:cav:set} for further information.
+Dynamic entry sets in the document body are local to the enclosing \env{refsection} environment, if any. Otherwise, they are assigned to reference section~0. Those defined in the preamble are assigned to reference section~0. Note that dynamic entry sets require Biber. They will not work with any other backend.
 
 \subsubsection{Electronic Publishing Information}
 \label{use:use:epr}
@@ -4047,7 +4221,7 @@ eprinttype  = {arxiv},
 <<eprintclass>> = {<<cs.DS>>},
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-There are two aliases which ease the integration of arXiv entries. \bibfield{archiveprefix} is treated as an alias of \bibfield{eprinttype}; \bibfield{primaryclass} is an alias of \bibfield{eprintclass}. If hyperlinks are enabled, the eprint identifier will be transformed into a link to \nolinkurl{arxiv.org}. See the package option \opt{arxiv} in \secref{use:opt:pre} for further details.
+There are two aliases which ease the integration of arXiv entries. \bibfield{archiveprefix} is treated as an alias of \bibfield{eprinttype}; \bibfield{primaryclass} is an alias of \bibfield{eprintclass}. If hyperlinks are enabled, the eprint identifier will be transformed into a link to \nolinkurl{arxiv.org}. See the package option \opt{arxiv} in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for further details.
 
 For \acr{JSTOR} references, put the stable \acr{JSTOR} number in the \bibfield{eprint} field and the string \texttt{jstor} in the \bibfield{eprinttype} field:
 
@@ -4122,7 +4296,7 @@ This is an abstract of entry `key1'.
 \endinput
 \end{ltxexample}
 %
-The name of the external file must be the entry key prefixed with \texttt{bibabstract-} or \texttt{bibannotation-}, respectively. You can change these prefixes by redefining \cmd{bibabstractprefix} and \cmd{bibannotationprefix}. Note that this feature needs to be enabled explicitly by setting the package option \opt{loadfiles} from \secref{use:opt:pre}. The option is disabled by default for performance reasons. Also note that any \bibfield{abstract} and \bibfield{annotation} fields in the \file{bib} file take precedence over the external files. Using external files is strongly recommended if you have long abstracts or a lot of annotations since this may increase memory requirements significantly. It is also more convenient to edit the text in a dedicated \latex file. Style authors should see \secref{aut:cav:prf} for further information.
+The name of the external file must be the entry key prefixed with \texttt{bibabstract-} or \texttt{bibannotation-}, respectively. You can change these prefixes by redefining \cmd{bibabstractprefix} and \cmd{bibannotationprefix}. Note that this feature needs to be enabled explicitly by setting the package option \opt{loadfiles} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The option is disabled by default for performance reasons. Also note that any \bibfield{abstract} and \bibfield{annotation} fields in the \file{bib} file take precedence over the external files. Using external files is strongly recommended if you have long abstracts or a lot of annotations since this may increase memory requirements significantly. It is also more convenient to edit the text in a dedicated \latex file. Style authors should see \secref{aut:cav:prf} for further information.
 
 \subsection{Hints and Caveats}
 \label{use:cav}
@@ -4576,7 +4750,7 @@ The entry key of an item in the \file{bib} file. This is the string used by \sty
 
 \fielditem{childentrykey}{string}
 
-When citing a subentry of a reference set, \sty{biblatex} provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrykey} field holds the entry key of the parent. The entry key of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrykey} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of a reference set.
+When citing a subentry of an entry set, \sty{biblatex} provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrykey} field holds the entry key of the parent. The entry key of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrykey} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of an entry set.
 
 \fielditem{entrytype}{string}
 
@@ -4584,11 +4758,11 @@ The entry type (\bibtype{book}, \bibtype{inbook}, etc.), given in lowercase lett
 
 \fielditem{childentrytype}{string}
 
-When citing a subentry of a reference set, \sty{biblatex} provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrytype} field holds the entry type of the parent. The entry type of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrytype} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of a reference set.
+When citing a subentry of an entry set, \sty{biblatex} provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrytype} field holds the entry type of the parent. The entry type of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrytype} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of an entry set.
 
 \fielditem{entrysetcount}{integer}
 
-This field holds an integer indicating the position of a set member in the reference set (starting at \texttt{1}). This field is only available in the subentries of a reference set.
+This field holds an integer indicating the position of a set member in the entry set (starting at \texttt{1}). This field is only available in the subentries of an entry set.
 
 \fielditem{namehash}{string}
 
@@ -4627,19 +4801,20 @@ This field holds the initial letter of the string used during sorting. This is u
 
 \fielditem{labelalpha}{literal}
 
-A label similar to the labels generated by the \path{alpha.bst} style of traditional \bibtex. This label consists of initials drawn from the \bibfield{labelname} list plus the last two digits of the publication year. The \bibfield{label} field may be used to override its non"=numeric portion. If the \bibfield{label} field is defined, \sty{biblatex} will use its value and append the last two digits of the publication year when generating \bibfield{labelalpha}. The \bibfield{shorthand} field may be used to override the entire label. If defined, \bibfield{labelalpha} is the \bibfield{shorthand} rather than an automatically generated label. A complete <alphabetic> label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelalpha} plus \bibfield{extraalpha}. Note that the \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelalpha} (\secref{use:opt:int}). See also \bibfield{extraalpha} as well as \cmd{labelalphaothers} in \secref{use:fmt:fmt}.
+A label similar to the labels generated by the \path{alpha.bst} style of traditional \bibtex. This label consists of initials drawn from the \bibfield{labelname} list plus the last two digits of the publication year. The \bibfield{label} field may be used to override its non"=numeric portion. If the \bibfield{label} field is defined, \sty{biblatex} will use its value and append the last two digits of the publication year when generating \bibfield{labelalpha}. The \bibfield{shorthand} field may be used to override the entire label. If defined, \bibfield{labelalpha} is the \bibfield{shorthand} rather than an automatically generated label. A complete <alphabetic> label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelalpha} plus \bibfield{extraalpha}. Note that the \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelalpha} (\secref{use:opt:pre:int}). See also \bibfield{extraalpha} as well as \cmd{labelalphaothers} in \secref{use:fmt:fmt}.
 
 \fielditem{extraalpha}{integer}
 
-The <alphabetic> citation scheme usually requires a letter to be appended to the label if the bibliography contains two or more works by the same author which were all published in the same year. In this case, the \bibfield{extraalpha} field holds an integer which may be converted to a letter with \cmd{mknumalph} or formatted in some other way. This field is similar to the role of \bibfield{extrayear} in the author"=year scheme. A complete <alphabetic> label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelalpha} plus \bibfield{extraalpha}. Note that the \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelalpha}, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. See also \bibfield{labelalpha} as well as \cmd{labelalphaothers} in \secref{use:fmt:fmt}.
+The <alphabetic> citation scheme usually requires a letter to be appended to the label if the bibliography contains two or more works by the same author which were all published in the same year. In this case, the \bibfield{extraalpha} field holds an integer which may be converted to a letter with \cmd{mknumalph} or formatted in some other way. This field is similar to the role of \bibfield{extrayear} in the author"=year scheme. A complete <alphabetic> label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelalpha} plus \bibfield{extraalpha}. Note that the \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelalpha}, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. See also \bibfield{labelalpha} as well as \cmd{labelalphaothers} in \secref{use:fmt:fmt}.
 
 \listitem{labelname}{name}
 
 The name to be printed in citations. This list is a copy of either the \bibfield{shortauthor}, the \bibfield{author}, the \bibfield{shorteditor}, the \bibfield{editor}, or the \bibfield{translator} list, which are normally checked for in this order. If no authors and editors are available, this list is undefined. Note that this list is also responsive to the \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} options, see \secref{use:opt:bib}. Citation styles should use this list when printing the name in a citation. This list is provided for convenience only and does not carry any additional meaning.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this field may be customized. See \secref{aut:ctm:fld} for details.
 
 \fielditem{labelnumber}{literal}
 
-The number of the bibliography entry, as required by numeric citation schemes. If the \bibfield{shorthand} field is defined, \sty{biblatex} does not assign a number to the respective entry. In this case \bibfield{labelnumber} is the shorthand rather than a number. Numeric styles must use the value of this field instead of a counter. Note that this field needs to be requested with the package option \opt{labelnumber}, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. Also see the package option \opt{defernumbers} in \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+The number of the bibliography entry, as required by numeric citation schemes. If the \bibfield{shorthand} field is defined, \sty{biblatex} does not assign a number to the respective entry. In this case \bibfield{labelnumber} is the shorthand rather than a number. Numeric styles must use the value of this field instead of a counter. Note that this field needs to be requested with the package option \opt{labelnumber}, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. Also see the package option \opt{defernumbers} in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \fielditem{prefixnumber}{literal}
 
@@ -4651,11 +4826,12 @@ The title to be printed in citations. If a short title is available, \bibfield{l
 
 \fielditem{labelyear}{literal}
 
-The publication year, as specified in the \bibfield{date} or the \bibfield{year} field, for use in author-year labels. A complete author-year label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelyear} plus \bibfield{extrayear}. Note that the \bibfield{labelyear} and \bibfield{extrayear} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelyear}, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. See also \bibfield{extrayear}.
+The publication year, as specified in the \bibfield{date} or the \bibfield{year} field, for use in author-year labels. A complete author-year label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelyear} plus \bibfield{extrayear}. Note that the \bibfield{labelyear} and \bibfield{extrayear} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelyear}, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. See also \bibfield{extrayear}.
+\BiberOnlyMark With Biber, this field may be customized. See \secref{aut:ctm:fld} for details.
 
 \fielditem{extrayear}{integer}
 
-The author"=year citation scheme usually requires a letter to be appended to the year if the bibliography contains two or more works by the same author which were all published in the same year. In this case, the \bibfield{extrayear} field holds an integer which may be converted to a letter with \cmd{mknumalph} or formatted in some other way. This field is undefined if there is only one work by the author in the bibliography or if all works by the author have different publication years. A complete author-year label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelyear} plus \bibfield{extrayear}. Note that the \bibfield{labelyear} and \bibfield{extrayear} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelyear}, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. See also \bibfield{labelyear}.
+The author"=year citation scheme usually requires a letter to be appended to the year if the bibliography contains two or more works by the same author which were all published in the same year. In this case, the \bibfield{extrayear} field holds an integer which may be converted to a letter with \cmd{mknumalph} or formatted in some other way. This field is undefined if there is only one work by the author in the bibliography or if all works by the author have different publication years. A complete author-year label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelyear} plus \bibfield{extrayear}. Note that the \bibfield{labelyear} and \bibfield{extrayear} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelyear}, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. See also \bibfield{labelyear}.
 
 \end{fieldlist}
 
@@ -4883,7 +5059,7 @@ This command defines <multicite> commands (\secref{use:cit:mlt}). The \prm{comma
 
 \cmditem{DeclareAutoCiteCommand}{name}[position]{cite}{multicite}
 
-This command provides definitions for the \cmd{autocite} and \cmd{autocites} commands from \secref{use:cit:aut}. The definitions are enabled with the \opt{autocite} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre}. The \prm{name} is an identifier which serves as the value passed to the package option. The autocite commands are built on top of backend commands like \cmd{parencite} and \cmd{parencites}. The arguments \prm{cite} and \prm{multicite} specify the backend commands to use. The \prm{cite} argument refers to \cmd{autocite} and \prm{multicite} refers to \cmd{autocites}. The \prm{position} argument controls the handling of any punctuation marks after the citation. Possible values are <\texttt{l}> and <\texttt{r}>. <\texttt{r}> means that the punctuation is placed to the right of the citation, \ie it will not be moved around. <\texttt{l}> means that any punctuation after the citation is moved to the left of the citation. This is useful with citations in footnotes since it will place the footnote mark after the terminal punctuation. This argument is optional and defaults to \texttt{r}. See also \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} and the \opt{autopunct} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre}. The following examples are real definitions taken from \path{biblatex.def}:
+This command provides definitions for the \cmd{autocite} and \cmd{autocites} commands from \secref{use:cit:aut}. The definitions are enabled with the \opt{autocite} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The \prm{name} is an identifier which serves as the value passed to the package option. The autocite commands are built on top of backend commands like \cmd{parencite} and \cmd{parencites}. The arguments \prm{cite} and \prm{multicite} specify the backend commands to use. The \prm{cite} argument refers to \cmd{autocite} and \prm{multicite} refers to \cmd{autocites}. The \prm{position} argument controls the handling of any punctuation marks after the citation. Possible values are <\texttt{l}> and <\texttt{r}>. <\texttt{r}> means that the punctuation is placed to the right of the citation, \ie it will not be moved around. <\texttt{l}> means that any punctuation after the citation is moved to the left of the citation. This is useful with citations in footnotes since it will place the footnote mark after the terminal punctuation. This argument is optional and defaults to \texttt{r}. See also \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} and the \opt{autopunct} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The following examples are real definitions taken from \path{biblatex.def}:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareAutoCiteCommand{plain}{\cite}{\cites}
@@ -4928,11 +5104,11 @@ This command prints a \prm{field} using the formatting directive \prm{format}, a
 
 \cmditem{printlist}[format][start\ensuremath\rangle--\ensuremath\langle stop]{literal list}
 
-This command loops over all items in a \prm{literal list}, starting at item number \prm{start} and stopping at item number \prm{stop}, including \prm{start} and \prm{stop} (all lists are numbered starting at~1). Each item is printed using the formatting directive \prm{format}, as defined with \cmd{DeclareListFormat}. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{literal list} is undefined, nothing is printed. If the \prm{format} is omitted, \cmd{printlist} tries using the name of the list as a format name. In this case, any type"=specific formatting directive will also take precedence over the generic one. If all of these formats are undefined, it falls back to \texttt{default} as a last resort. The \prm{start} argument defaults to 1; \prm{stop} defaults to the total number of items in the list. If the total number is greater than \prm{maxitems}, \prm{stop} defaults to \prm{minitems} (see \secref{use:opt:pre}). See \cmd{printnames} for further details. Note that \cmd{printlist} provides the name of the literal list currently being processed in \cmd{currentlist} for use in list formatting directives.
+This command loops over all items in a \prm{literal list}, starting at item number \prm{start} and stopping at item number \prm{stop}, including \prm{start} and \prm{stop} (all lists are numbered starting at~1). Each item is printed using the formatting directive \prm{format}, as defined with \cmd{DeclareListFormat}. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{literal list} is undefined, nothing is printed. If the \prm{format} is omitted, \cmd{printlist} tries using the name of the list as a format name. In this case, any type"=specific formatting directive will also take precedence over the generic one. If all of these formats are undefined, it falls back to \texttt{default} as a last resort. The \prm{start} argument defaults to 1; \prm{stop} defaults to the total number of items in the list. If the total number is greater than \prm{maxitems}, \prm{stop} defaults to \prm{minitems} (see \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}). See \cmd{printnames} for further details. Note that \cmd{printlist} provides the name of the literal list currently being processed in \cmd{currentlist} for use in list formatting directives.
 
 \cmditem{printnames}[format][start\ensuremath\rangle--\ensuremath\langle stop]{name list}
 
-This command loops over all items in a \prm{name list}, starting at item number \prm{start} and stopping at item number \prm{stop}, including \prm{start} and \prm{stop} (all lists are numbered starting at~1). Each item is printed using the formatting directive \prm{format}, as defined with \cmd{DeclareNameFormat}. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{name list} is undefined, nothing is printed. If the \prm{format} is omitted, \cmd{printnames} tries using the name of the list as a format name. In this case, any type"=specific formatting directive will also take precedence over the generic one. If all of these formats are undefined, it falls back to \texttt{default} as a last resort. The \prm{start} argument defaults to 1; \prm{stop} defaults to the total number of items in the list. If the total number is greater than \prm{maxnames}, \prm{stop} defaults to \prm{minnames} (see \secref{use:opt:pre}). If you want to select a range but use the default list format, the first optional argument must still be given, but is left empty:
+This command loops over all items in a \prm{name list}, starting at item number \prm{start} and stopping at item number \prm{stop}, including \prm{start} and \prm{stop} (all lists are numbered starting at~1). Each item is printed using the formatting directive \prm{format}, as defined with \cmd{DeclareNameFormat}. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{name list} is undefined, nothing is printed. If the \prm{format} is omitted, \cmd{printnames} tries using the name of the list as a format name. In this case, any type"=specific formatting directive will also take precedence over the generic one. If all of these formats are undefined, it falls back to \texttt{default} as a last resort. The \prm{start} argument defaults to 1; \prm{stop} defaults to the total number of items in the list. If the total number is greater than \prm{maxnames}, \prm{stop} defaults to \prm{minnames} (see \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}). If you want to select a range but use the default list format, the first optional argument must still be given, but is left empty:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \printnames[][1-3]{...}
@@ -4960,11 +5136,11 @@ This command prints \prm{text}, which may be printable text or arbitrary code ge
 
 \cmditem{printfile}[format]{file}
 
-This command is similar to \cmd{printtext} except that the second argument is a file name rather than literal text. The \prm{file} argument must be the name of a valid \latex file found in \tex's search path. \cmd{printfile} will use \cmd{input} to load this \prm{file}. If there is no such file, \cmd{printfile} does nothing. The optional \prm{format} argument specifies a field formatting directive to be applied to the \prm{file}. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{format} is omitted, the \prm{file} is printed as is. Note that this feature needs to be enabled explicitly by setting the package option \opt{loadfiles} from \secref{use:opt:pre}. By default, \cmd{printfile} will not input any files.
+This command is similar to \cmd{printtext} except that the second argument is a file name rather than literal text. The \prm{file} argument must be the name of a valid \latex file found in \tex's search path. \cmd{printfile} will use \cmd{input} to load this \prm{file}. If there is no such file, \cmd{printfile} does nothing. The optional \prm{format} argument specifies a field formatting directive to be applied to the \prm{file}. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{format} is omitted, the \prm{file} is printed as is. Note that this feature needs to be enabled explicitly by setting the package option \opt{loadfiles} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. By default, \cmd{printfile} will not input any files.
 
 \csitem{printdate}
 
-This command prints the date of the entry, as specified in the fields \bibfield{date} or \bibfield{month}\slash \bibfield{year}. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{date} from \secref{use:opt:pre}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
+This command prints the date of the entry, as specified in the fields \bibfield{date} or \bibfield{month}\slash \bibfield{year}. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{date} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
 
 \csitem{printdateextra}
 
@@ -4972,15 +5148,15 @@ Similar to \cmd{printdate} but incorporates the \bibfield{extrayear} field in th
 
 \csitem{printurldate}
 
-This command prints the \bibfield{urldate} of the entry. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{urldate} from \secref{use:opt:pre}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
+This command prints the \bibfield{urldate} of the entry. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{urldate} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
 
 \csitem{printorigdate}
 
-This command prints the \bibfield{origdate} of the entry. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{origdate} from \secref{use:opt:pre}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
+This command prints the \bibfield{origdate} of the entry. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{origdate} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
 
 \csitem{printeventdate}
 
-This command prints the \bibfield{eventdate} of the entry. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{eventdate} from \secref{use:opt:pre}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
+This command prints the \bibfield{eventdate} of the entry. The format is controlled by the package option \opt{eventdate} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Note that this command interfaces with the punctuation tracker. There is no need to wrap it in a \cmd{printtext} command.
 
 \cmditem{indexfield}[format]{field}
 
@@ -4995,8 +5171,9 @@ This command is similar to \cmd{printlist} except that the items in the list are
 This command is similar to \cmd{printnames} except that the items in the list are not printed but added to the index using the formatting directive \prm{format}, as defined with \cmd{DeclareIndexNameFormat}. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{name list} is undefined, this command does nothing. If the \prm{format} is omitted, \cmd{indexnames} tries using the name of the list as a format name. In this case, any type"=specific formatting directive will also take precedence over the generic one. If all of these formats are undefined, it falls back to \texttt{default} as a last resort.
 
 \cmditem{entrydata}{key}{code}
+\cmditem*{entrydata*}{key}{code}
 
-Data commands like \cmd{printfield} normally use the data of the entry currently being processed. You may use \cmd{entrydata} to switch contexts locally. The \prm{key} is the entry key of the entry to use locally. The \prm{code} is arbitrary code to be executed in this context. This code will be executed in a group. See \secref{aut:cav:mif} for an example. Note that this command will automatically switch languages if the \opt{babel} package option is enabled.
+Data commands like \cmd{printfield} normally use the data of the entry currently being processed. You may use \cmd{entrydata} to switch contexts locally. The \prm{key} is the entry key of the entry to use locally. The \prm{code} is arbitrary code to be executed in this context. This code will be executed in a group. See \secref{aut:cav:mif} for an example. Note that this command will automatically switch languages if the \opt{babel} package option is enabled. The starred version \cmd{entrydata*} will clone all fields of the enclosing entry, using field, counter, and other resource names prefixed with the string <\texttt{saved}>. This is useful when comparing two data sets. For example, inside the \prm{code} argument, the \bibfield{author} field holds the author of entry \prm{key} and the author of the enclosing entry is available as \bibfield{savedauthor}. The \cnt{author} counter holds the number of names in the \bibfield{author} field of \prm{key}; the \bibfield{savedauthor} counter refers to the author count of the enclosing entry.
 
 \cmditem{entryset}{precode}{postcode}
 
@@ -5007,21 +5184,24 @@ This command is intended for use in bibliography drivers handling \bibtype{set}
 \subsubsection{Formatting Directives}
 \label{aut:bib:fmt}
 
-This section introduces the commands used to define the formatting directives required by the data commands from \secref{aut:bib:dat}. Note that all standard formats are defined in \path{biblatex.def} to make it easier to look up the defaults.
+This section introduces the commands used to define the formatting directives required by the data commands from \secref{aut:bib:dat}. Note that all standard formats are defined in \path{biblatex.def}.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
-\cmditem{DeclareFieldFormat}[entry type]{format}{code}
+\cmditem{DeclareFieldFormat}[entry type, \dots]{format}{code}
+\cmditem*{DeclareFieldFormat}*{format}{code}
 
-Defines the field format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed by \cmd{printfield}. The value of the field will be passed to \prm{code} as its first and only argument. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The name of the field currently being processed is available in \cmd{currentfield} in field formatting directives.
+Defines the field format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed by \cmd{printfield}. The value of the field will be passed to the \prm{code} as its first and only argument. The name of the field currently being processed is available to the \prm{code} as \cmd{currentfield}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. The starred variant of this command is similar to the regular version, except that all type-specific formats are cleared.
 
-\cmditem{DeclareListFormat}[entry type]{format}{code}
+\cmditem{DeclareListFormat}[entry type, \dots]{format}{code}
+\cmditem*{DeclareListFormat}*{format}{code}
 
-Defines the literal list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every item in a list processed by \cmd{printlist}. The current item will be passed to \prm{code} as its first and only argument. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. Note that the formatting directive also handles the punctuation to be inserted between the individual items in the list. You need to check whether you are in the middle of or at the end of the list, \ie whether \cnt{listcount} is smaller than or equal to \cnt{liststop}. The name of the literal list currently being processed is available in \cmd{currentlist} in list formatting directives.
+Defines the literal list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every item in a list processed by \cmd{printlist}. The current item will be passed to the \prm{code} as its first and only argument. The name of the literal list currently being processed is available to the \prm{code} as \cmd{currentlist}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. Note that the formatting directive also handles the punctuation to be inserted between the individual items in the list. You need to check whether you are in the middle of or at the end of the list, \ie whether \cnt{listcount} is smaller than or equal to \cnt{liststop}. The starred variant of this command is similar to the regular version, except that all type-specific formats are cleared.
 
-\cmditem{DeclareNameFormat}[entry type]{format}{code}
+\cmditem{DeclareNameFormat}[entry type, \dots]{format}{code}
+\cmditem*{DeclareNameFormat}*{format}{code}
 
-Defines the name list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every name in a list processed by \cmd{printnames}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The individual parts of a name will be passed to \prm{code} as separate arguments. These arguments are as follows:
+Defines the name list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every name in a list processed by \cmd{printnames}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. The individual parts of a name will be passed to the \prm{code} as separate arguments. These arguments are as follows:
 
 \begin{argumentlist}{00}
 \item[\#1] The last names. If a name consists of a single part only (for example, <Aristotle>), this part will be treated as the last name.
@@ -5034,20 +5214,23 @@ Defines the name list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrar
 Note that name affixes are referred to as the <junior part> of the name in the \bibtex documentation.
 \item[\#8] The name affixes, given as initials.
 \end{argumentlist}
+%
+If a certain part of a name is not available, the corresponding argument will be empty, hence you may use \cmd{ifblank} tests to check for the inidividual parts of a name. The name of the name list currently being processed is available to the \prm{code} as \cmd{currentname}. All initials are sensitive to the \opt{terseinits} package option, see \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for details. Note that the formatting directive also handles the punctuation to be inserted between separate names and between the individual parts of a name. You need to check whether you are in the middle of or at the end of the list, \ie whether \cnt{listcount} is smaller than or equal to \cnt{liststop}. The starred variant of this command is similar to the regular version, except that all type-specific formats are cleared.
 
-If a certain part of a name is not available, the corresponding argument will be empty, hence you may use \cmd{ifblank} tests to check for the inidividual parts of a name. All initials are sensitive to the \opt{terseinits} package option, see \secref{use:opt:pre} for details. Note that the formatting directive also handles the punctuation to be inserted between separate names and between the individual parts of a name. You need to check whether you are in the middle of or at the end of the list, \ie whether \cnt{listcount} is smaller than or equal to \cnt{liststop}. The name of the name list currently being processed is available in \cmd{currentname} in name formatting directives.
-
-\cmditem{DeclareIndexFieldFormat}[entry type]{format}{code}
+\cmditem{DeclareIndexFieldFormat}[entry type, \dots]{format}{code}
+\cmditem*{DeclareIndexFieldFormat}*{format}{code}
 
-Defines the field format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed by \cmd{indexfield}. The value of the field will be passed to \prm{code} as its first and only argument. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. This command is similar to \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat} except that the data handled by \prm{code} is not intended to be printed but written to the index. Note that \cmd{indexfield} will execute \prm{code} as is, \ie \prm{code} must include \cmd{index} or a similar command. The name of the field currently being processed is available in \cmd{currentfield} in field indexing directives.
+Defines the field format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed by \cmd{indexfield}. The value of the field will be passed to the \prm{code} as its first and only argument. The name of the field currently being processed is available to the \prm{code} as \cmd{currentfield}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. This command is similar to \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat} except that the data handled by the \prm{code} is not intended to be printed but written to the index. Note that \cmd{indexfield} will execute the \prm{code} as is, \ie the \prm{code} must include \cmd{index} or a similar command. The starred variant of this command is similar to the regular version, except that all type-specific formats are cleared.
 
-\cmditem{DeclareIndexListFormat}[entry type]{format}{code}
+\cmditem{DeclareIndexListFormat}[entry type, \dots]{format}{code}
+\cmditem*{DeclareIndexListFormat}*{format}{code}
 
-Defines the literal list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every item in a list processed by \cmd{indexlist}. The current item will be passed to \prm{code} as its only argument. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. This command is similar to \cmd{DeclareListFormat} except that the data handled by \prm{code} is not intended to be printed but written to the index. Note that \cmd{indexlist} will execute \prm{code} as is, \ie \prm{code} must include \cmd{index} or a similar command. The name of the literal list currently being processed is available in \cmd{currentlist} in list indexing directives.
+Defines the literal list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every item in a list processed by \cmd{indexlist}. The current item will be passed to the \prm{code} as its only argument. The name of the literal list currently being processed is available to the \prm{code} as \cmd{currentlist}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. This command is similar to \cmd{DeclareListFormat} except that the data handled by the \prm{code} is not intended to be printed but written to the index. Note that \cmd{indexlist} will execute the \prm{code} as is, \ie the \prm{code} must include \cmd{index} or a similar command. The starred variant of this command is similar to the regular version, except that all type-specific formats are cleared.
 
-\cmditem{DeclareIndexNameFormat}[entry type]{format}{code}
+\cmditem{DeclareIndexNameFormat}[entry type, \dots]{format}{code}
+\cmditem*{DeclareIndexNameFormat}*{format}{code}
 
-Defines the name list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every name in a list processed by \cmd{indexnames}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The parts of the name will be passed to \prm{code} as separate arguments. This command is similar to \cmd{DeclareNameFormat} except that the data handled by \prm{code} is not intended to be printed but written to the index. Note that \cmd{indexnames} will execute \prm{code} as is, \ie \prm{code} must include \cmd{index} or a similar command. The name of the name list currently being processed is available in \cmd{currentname} in name indexing directives.
+Defines the name list format \prm{format}. This formatting directive is arbitrary \prm{code} to be executed for every name in a list processed by \cmd{indexnames}. The name of the name list currently being processed is available to the \prm{code} as \cmd{currentname}. If an \prm{entry type} is specified, the format is specific to that type. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. The parts of the name will be passed to the \prm{code} as separate arguments. This command is very similar to \cmd{DeclareNameFormat} except that the data handled by the \prm{code} is not intended to be printed but written to the index. Note that \cmd{indexnames} will execute the \prm{code} as is, \ie the \prm{code} must include \cmd{index} or a similar command. The starred variant of this command is similar to the regular version, except that all type-specific formats are cleared.
 
 \cmditem{DeclareFieldAlias}[entry type]{alias}[format entry type]{format}
 
@@ -5075,6 +5258,236 @@ Declares \prm{alias} to be an alias of the name list format \prm{format}. If an
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
+\subsection{Customization}
+\label{aut:ctm}
+
+\subsubsection{Sorting}
+\label{aut:ctm:srt}
+
+In addition to the predefined sorting schemes discussed in \secref{use:srt}, it is possible to define new ones or modify the default definitions. The sorting process may be customized further by excluding certain fields from sorting on a per-type basis and by automatically populating the \bibfield{presort} field on a per-type basis. Note that custom sorting schemes require Biber. They will not work with any other backend.
+
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+
+\cmditem{DeclareSortingScheme}{name}{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+This command defines the sorting scheme \prm{name}. The \prm{name} is the identifier passed to the \opt{sorting} option (\secref{use:opt:pre:gen}) when selecting the sorting scheme. The \prm{specification} is an undelimited list of \cmd{sort} directives which specify the elements to be considered in the sorting process. Spaces, tabs, and line endings may be used freely to visually arrange the \prm{specification}. Blank lines are not permissible.
+
+\cmditem{sort}{elements}
+
+Specifies the elements considered in the sorting process. The \prm{elements} are an undelimited list of \cmd{name}, \cmd{list}, \cmd{field}, \cmd{literal}, and \cmd{citeorder} commands which are evalutated in the order in which they are given. If an element is defined, it is added to the sort key and the sorting routine skips to the next \cmd{sort} directive. If it is undefined, the next element is evaluated. Since literal strings are always defined, any \cmd{literal} commands should be the sole or the last element in a \cmd{sort} directive. The \cmd{sort} command supports the following optional arguments:
+
+\begin{optionlist*}
+
+\choitem[ascending]{direction}{ascending, descending}
+
+The sort direction, which may be either \texttt{ascending} or \texttt{descending}. The default is ascending order.
+
+\boolitem[false]{final}
+
+This option marks a \cmd{sort} directive as the final one in the \prm{specification}. If one of the \prm{elements} is available, the remainder of the \prm{specification} will be ignored. The short form \opt{final} is equivalent to \kvopt{final}{true}.
+
+\choitem[both]{pass}{label, final}
+
+When generating special fields such as \bibfield{extraalpha}, the sorting routine may need to sort the entries twice because label generation may require a sort order different from the final order of the bibliography. This option indicates that the directive should be considered on the first (\texttt{label}) or the second (\texttt{final}) pass only. See the examples below for details.
+
+\boolitem{sortcase}
+
+Whether to sort case"=sensitively. The default setting depends on the global \opt{sortcase} option.
+
+\boolitem{sortupper}
+
+Whether to sort in <uppercase before lowercase> (\texttt{true}) or <lowercase before uppercase> order (\texttt{false}). The default setting depends on the global \opt{sortupper} option.
+
+\end{optionlist*}
+
+\cmditem{name}{name list}
+
+The \cmd{name} element adds a \prm{name list} to the sorting specification. If the \prm{name list} is undefined, the element is skipped.
+
+\cmditem{list}{literal list}
+
+The \cmd{list} element adds a \prm{literal list} to the sorting specification. If the \prm{literal list} is undefined, the element is skipped.
+
+\cmditem{field}[key=value, \dots]{field}
+
+The \cmd{field} element adds a \prm{field} to the sorting specification. If the \prm{field} is undefined, the element is skipped. The \cmd{field} command supports the following optional arguments:
+
+\begin{optionlist*}
+
+\choitem[left]{padside}{left, right}
+
+Pads a field on the \texttt{left} or \texttt{right} side using \opt{padchar} so that its width is \opt{padwidth}. If no padding option is set, no padding is done at all. If any padding option is specified, then padding is performed and the missing options are assigned built-in default values. If padding and substring matching are both specified, the substring match is performed first. Padding is particularly useful with numeric fields. For example, the command
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\field[padside=left,padwidth=2,padchar=0]{volume}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+will pad the \bibfield{volume} field with leading zeros to a width of two characters. This way, volumes are sorted by numeric value (\texttt{01\slash 02\slash 11\slash 12}) rather than in alphabetic order (\texttt{1\slash 11\slash 12\slash 2}).
+
+\intitem[4]{padwidth}
+
+The target width in characters.
+
+\valitem[0]{padchar}{character}
+
+The character to be used when padding the field.
+
+\choitem[left]{strside}{left, right}
+
+Performs a substring match on the \texttt{left} or \texttt{right} side of the field. The number of characters to match is specified by the corresponding \texttt{strwidth} option. If no substring option is set, no substring matching is performed at all. If any substring option is specified, then substring matching is performed and the missing options are assigned built-in default values. If padding and substring matching are both specified, the substring match is performed first.
+
+\intitem[4]{strwidth}
+
+The number of characters to match.
+
+\end{optionlist*}
+
+\cmditem{literal}{string}
+
+The \cmd{literal} element adds a literal \prm{string} to the sorting specification. This is useful as a fallback if certain fields are not available.
+
+\csitem{citeorder}
+
+The \cmd{citeorder} element has a special meaning. It indicates that the entries should be kept in the order in which they were cited. It is usually the only element in the \prm{specification}:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareSortingScheme{none}{
+  \sort{\citeorder}
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
+Here are some examples. In the first example, we define a simple name\slash title\slash year scheme. The name element may be either the \bibfield{author}, the \bibfield{editor}, or the \bibfield{translator}. Given this specification, the sorting routine will use the first element which is available and continue with the \bibfield{title}. Note that the options \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} are considered automatically in the sorting process:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareSortingScheme{sample}{
+  \sort{
+    \name{<<author>>}
+    \name{<<editor>>}
+    \name{<<translator>>}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field{<<title>>}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field{<<year>>}
+  }
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+In the next example, we define the same scheme in a more elaborate way, considering special fields such as \bibfield{presort}, \bibfield{sortkey}, \bibfield{sortname}, etc. Since the \bibfield{sortkey} field specifies the master sort key, it needs to override all other elements except for \bibfield{presort}. This is indicated by the \opt{final} option. If the \bibfield{sortkey} field is available, processing will stop at this point. If not, the sorting routine continues with the next \cmd{sort} directive. This setup corresponds to the default definition of the \texttt{nty} scheme:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareSortingScheme{nty}{
+  \sort{
+    \field{<<presort>>}
+  }
+  \sort[<<final>>]{
+    \field{<<sortkey>>}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \name{<<sortname>>}
+    \name{author}
+    \name{editor}
+    \name{translator}
+    \field{sorttitle}
+    \field{title}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field{<<sorttitle>>}
+    \field{title}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field{<<sortyear>>}
+    \field{year}
+  }
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+The next example is more complex still. In some cases, the backend needs to sort the entries twice. An example is the \texttt{anyt} scheme, which includes the automatically generated \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha} fields. We want the \bibfield{extraalpha} field to be considered in the sorting process because the bibliography of \texttt{alphabetic} styles is usually sorted by label and it would be odd to have |Abc95a| after |Abc95b|. However, generating \bibfield{extraalpha} requires that the entries be already sorted (by \bibfield{labelalpha}). Therefore, we establish the sorting order required for the generation of the \bibfield{extraalpha} field on the first pass. On the second and final pass, the newly generated field is considered in the sorting process. Note that \bibfield{labelalpha} is shifting positions:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareSortingScheme{anyt}{%
+  \sort{
+    \field{presort}
+  }
+  \sort[<<pass=label>>]{
+    \field{<<labelalpha>>}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field[final]{sortkey}
+  }
+  \sort[<<pass=final>>]{
+    \field{<<labelalpha>>}
+  }
+  \sort[<<pass=final>>]{
+    \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{<<extraalpha>>}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \name{sortname}
+    \name{author}
+    \name{editor}
+    \name{translator}
+    \field{sorttitle}
+    \field{title}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field{sortyear}
+    \field{year}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field{sorttitle}
+    \field{title}
+  }
+  \sort{
+    \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}
+    \literal{0000}
+  }
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+
+\cmditem{DeclareSortExclusion}{entry type, \dots}{field, \dots}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Specifies fields to be excluded from sorting on a per-type basis. The \prm{entry type} argument and the \prm{field} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. A blank \prm{field} argument will clear all exclusions for this \prm{entry type}.
+
+\cmditem{DeclarePresort}[entry type, \dots]{string}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Specifies are string to be used to automatically populate the \bibfield{presort} field of entries without a \bibfield{presort} field. The \bibfield{presort} may be defined globally or on a per-type basis. If the optional \prm{entry type} argument is given, the \prm{string} applies to the respective entry type. If not, it serves as the global default value. Specifying an \prm{entry type} in conjunction with a blank \prm{string} will clear the type-specific setting. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values.
+
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
+\subsubsection{Special Fields}
+\label{aut:ctm:fld}
+
+Some of the automatically generated fields from \secref{aut:bbx:fld:lab} may be customized. Note that this requires Biber.
+
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+
+\cmditem{DeclareLabelname}[entry type, \dots]{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Defines the fields to consider when generating the \bibfield{labelname} field (see \secref{aut:bbx:fld:lab}). The \prm{specification} is a comma"=separated list of fields. The fields are checked in the order listed and the first field which is available will be used as \bibfield{labelname}. This is the default definition:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareLabelname{shortauthor,author,shorteditor,editor,translator}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+The \bibfield{labelname} field may be customized globally or on a per-type basis. If the optional \prm{entry type} argument is given, the specification applies to the respective entry type. If not, it is applied globally. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values.
+
+\cmditem{DeclareLabelyear}[entry type, \dots]{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Defines the date components to consider when generating the \bibfield{labelyear} field (see \secref{aut:bbx:fld:lab}). The \prm{specification} is a comma"=separated list of date components. The items are checked in the order listed and the first item which is available will be used as \bibfield{labelyear}. Note that the items are date components, not date fields. This is the default definition:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareLabelyear{year,eventyear,origyear,urlyear}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+The \bibfield{labelyear} field may be customized globally or on a per-type basis. If the optional \prm{entry type} argument is given, the specification applies to the respective entry type. If not, it is applied globally. The \prm{entry type} argument may be a comma"=separated list of values. See also \secref{aut:bbx:fld:dat}.
+
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
 \subsection{Auxiliary Commands}
 \label{aut:aux}
 
@@ -5276,11 +5689,11 @@ This command is similar to \cmd{ifmorenames} but checks the current literal list
 
 \cmditem{iffirstinits}{true}{false}
 
-Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false}, depending on the state of the \opt{firstinits} package option (see \secref{use:opt:int}). This command is intended for use in formatting directives for name lists.
+Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false}, depending on the state of the \opt{firstinits} package option (see \secref{use:opt:pre:int}). This command is intended for use in formatting directives for name lists.
 
 \cmditem{ifciteseen}{true}{false}
 
-Executes \prm{true} if the entry currently being processed has been cited before, and \prm{false} otherwise. This command is robust and intended for use in citation styles. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the citation tracking is local to these environments. Note that the citation tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{citetracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the citation tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. If the citation tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
+Executes \prm{true} if the entry currently being processed has been cited before, and \prm{false} otherwise. This command is robust and intended for use in citation styles. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the citation tracking is local to these environments. Note that the citation tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{citetracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the citation tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. If the citation tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
 
 \cmditem{ifentryseen}{entrykey}{true}{false}
 
@@ -5294,19 +5707,19 @@ Apart from the additional argument, \cmd{ifentryseen} behaves like \cmd{ifcitese
 
 \cmditem{ifciteibid}{true}{false}
 
-Expands to \prm{true} if the entry currently being processed is the same as the last one, and to \prm{false} otherwise. This command is intended for use in citation styles. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the tracking is local to these environments. Note that the <ibidem> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{ibidtracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
+Expands to \prm{true} if the entry currently being processed is the same as the last one, and to \prm{false} otherwise. This command is intended for use in citation styles. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the tracking is local to these environments. Note that the <ibidem> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{ibidtracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
 
 \cmditem{ifciteidem}{true}{false}
 
-Expands to \prm{true} if the primary name (\ie the author or editor) in the entry currently being processed is the same as the last one, and to \prm{false} otherwise. This command is intended for use in citation styles. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the tracking is local to these environments. Note that the <idem> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{idemtracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
+Expands to \prm{true} if the primary name (\ie the author or editor) in the entry currently being processed is the same as the last one, and to \prm{false} otherwise. This command is intended for use in citation styles. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the tracking is local to these environments. Note that the <idem> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{idemtracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
 
 \cmditem{ifopcit}{true}{false}
 
-This command is similar to \cmd{ifciteibid} except that it expands to \prm{true} if the entry currently being processed is the same as the last one \emph{by this author or editor}. Note that the <opcit> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{opcittracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
+This command is similar to \cmd{ifciteibid} except that it expands to \prm{true} if the entry currently being processed is the same as the last one \emph{by this author or editor}. Note that the <opcit> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{opcittracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
 
 \cmditem{ifloccit}{true}{false}
 
-This command is similar to \cmd{ifopcit} except that it also compares the \prm{postnote} arguments and expands to \prm{true} only if they match and are numerical (in the sense of \cmd{ifnumerals} from \secref{aut:aux:tst}), \ie \cmd{ifloccit} will yield \texttt{true} if the citation refers to the same page cited before. Note that the <loccit> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{loccittracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
+This command is similar to \cmd{ifopcit} except that it also compares the \prm{postnote} arguments and expands to \prm{true} only if they match and are numerical (in the sense of \cmd{ifnumerals} from \secref{aut:aux:tst}), \ie \cmd{ifloccit} will yield \texttt{true} if the citation refers to the same page cited before. Note that the <loccit> tracker needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{loccittracker}. The behavior of this test depends on the mode the tracker is operating in, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. If the tracker is disabled, the test always yields \prm{false}. Also see the \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
 
 \cmditem{iffirstonpage}{true}{false}
 
@@ -5368,7 +5781,7 @@ Similar to \cmd{ifbibstring}, but uses the value of a \prm{field} rather than a
 
 \cmditem{ifcapital}{true}{false}
 
-Executes \prm{true} if \sty{biblatex}'s punctuation tracker would capitalize a bibliography string at the current location, and \prm{false} otherwise. This command is robust. It may be useful for conditional capitalization of certain parts of a name in a formatting directive.
+Executes \prm{true} if \sty{biblatex}'s punctuation tracker would capitalize a localization string at the current location, and \prm{false} otherwise. This command is robust. It may be useful for conditional capitalization of certain parts of a name in a formatting directive.
 
 \cmditem{ifcitation}{true}{false}
 
@@ -5384,11 +5797,11 @@ Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false} depending on the \opt{natbib} option from \
 
 \cmditem{ifciteindex}{true}{false}
 
-Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false} depending on the \opt{indexing} option from \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false} depending on the \opt{indexing} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \cmditem{ifbibindex}{true}{false}
 
-Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false} depending on the \opt{indexing} option from \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false} depending on the \opt{indexing} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \cmditem{iffootnote}{true}{false}
 
@@ -5400,7 +5813,7 @@ The \cnt{uniquename} counter refers to the \bibfield{labelname} list. Its value
 
 \cntitem{parenlevel}
 
-The current nesting level of parentheses and\slash or brackets. This information is only available if the \opt{parentracker} from \secref{use:opt:int} is enabled.
+The current nesting level of parentheses and\slash or brackets. This information is only available if the \opt{parentracker} from \secref{use:opt:pre:int} is enabled.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -5640,6 +6053,10 @@ See the \sty{babel} manual and \tabref{bib:fld:tab1} for a list of languages ide
 
 This command is similar to \cmd{PackageWarning} but prints the entry key of the entry currently being processed in addition to the input line number. It may be used in the bibliography as well as in citation commands. If the \prm{message} is fairly long, use \cmd{MessageBreak} to include line breaks. Note that the standard \cmd{PackageWarning} command does not provide a meaningful clue when used in the bibliography since the input line number is the line on which the \cmd{printbibliography} command was given.
 
+\cmditem{RequireBiber}[severity]
+
+This command is intended for use in \file{cbx}\slash\file{bbx} files and in the \texttt{@preamble} of \file{bib} files. It checks the selected backend and warns if it is not Biber. The optional \prm{severity} argument is an integer specifying the severity. The value 1 triggers an informational message stating that Biber is recommended; 2 triggers a warning stating that Biber is required and the style\slash\file{bib} file may not work properly; 3 triggers an error stating that Biber is strictly required and the style\slash\file{bib} file will not work at all with any other backend. If \cmd{RequireBiber} is used multiple times, the highest \prm{severity} takes precedence. \file{cbx}\slash\file{bbx} files on the one hand and the \texttt{@preamble} snippets of all \file{bib} files on the other are tracked seperately. If the optional \prm{severity} argument is omitted, the default severity is 2 (warning).
+
 \boolitem{pagetracker}
 
 These commands activate or deactivate the citation tracker locally (this will affect the \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}). They are intended for use in the definition of citation commands or anywhere in the document body. If a citation command is to be excluded from page tracking, use \cmd{pagetrackerfalse} in the \prm{precode} argument of \cmd{DeclareCiteCommand}. See \secref{aut:cbx:cbx} for details. Note that these commands have no effect if page tracking has been disabled globally.
@@ -5654,10 +6071,10 @@ These commands activate or deactivate the \texttt{backref} tracker locally. They
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
-\subsection{Punctuation and Spacing}
+\subsection[Punctuation]{Punctuation and Spacing}
 \label{aut:pct}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package provides elaborate facilities designed to manage and track punctuation and spacing in the bibliography and in citations. These facilities work on two levels. The high"=level commands discussed in \secref{aut:pct:new} deal with punctuation and whitespace inserted by the bibliography style between the individual segments of a bibliography entry. The commands in \secref{aut:pct:chk, aut:pct:pct, aut:pct:spc} work at a lower level. They use \tex's space factor and modified space factor codes to track punctuation in a robust and efficient way. This way it is possible to detect trailing punctuation marks within fields, not only those explicitly inserted between fields. The same technique is also used for automatic capitalization of bibliography strings, see \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} as well as \secref{aut:str} for details. Note that these facilities are only made available locally in citations and bibliographies. They will not affect any other part of a document.
+The \sty{biblatex} package provides elaborate facilities designed to manage and track punctuation and spacing in the bibliography and in citations. These facilities work on two levels. The high"=level commands discussed in \secref{aut:pct:new} deal with punctuation and whitespace inserted by the bibliography style between the individual segments of a bibliography entry. The commands in \secref{aut:pct:chk, aut:pct:pct, aut:pct:spc} work at a lower level. They use \tex's space factor and modified space factor codes to track punctuation in a robust and efficient way. This way it is possible to detect trailing punctuation marks within fields, not only those explicitly inserted between fields. The same technique is also used for automatic capitalization of localization strings, see \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} as well as \secref{aut:str} for details. Note that these facilities are only made available locally in citations and bibliographies. They will not affect any other part of a document.
 
 \subsubsection{Block and Unit Punctuation}
 \label{aut:pct:new}
@@ -5840,7 +6257,7 @@ This definition is restored automatically whenever the \opt{autopunct} package o
 
 \cmditem{DeclareCapitalPunctuation}{characters}
 
-When \sty{biblatex} inserts bibliography strings, \ie key terms such as <edition> or <volume>, it automatically capitalizes them after terminal punctuation marks. This command defines the punctuation marks which will cause bibliography strings to be capitalized if one of them preceds a string. Note that \prm{characters} is an undelimited list of characters. Valid \prm{characters} are period, comma, semicolon, colon, exclamation and question mark. The package default is:
+When \sty{biblatex} inserts localization strings, \ie key terms such as <edition> or <volume>, it automatically capitalizes them after terminal punctuation marks. This command defines the punctuation marks which will cause localization strings to be capitalized if one of them preceds a string. Note that \prm{characters} is an undelimited list of characters. Valid \prm{characters} are period, comma, semicolon, colon, exclamation and question mark. The package default is:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareCapitalPunctuation{.!?}
@@ -5893,17 +6310,17 @@ Undoes the settings applied by \cmd{uspunctuation}, restoring standard punctuati
 \subsubsection{Correcting Punctuation Tracking}
 \label{aut:pct:ctr}
 
-The facilities for punctuation tracking and automatic capitalization are very reliable under normal circumstances, but there are always marginal cases which may require manual intervention. Typical cases are bibliography strings printed as the first word in a footnote (which is usually treated as the beginning of a paragaph as far as capitalization is concerned, but \tex is not in vertical mode at this point) or punctuation after periods which are not really end"=of"=sentence periods (for example, after an ellipsis like «[\dots\unkern]» a command such as \cmd{addperiod} would do nothing since parentheses and brackets are transparent to the punctuation tracker). In such cases, use the following commands in bibliography and citation styles to mark the beginning or middle of a sentence if and where required:
+The facilities for punctuation tracking and automatic capitalization are very reliable under normal circumstances, but there are always marginal cases which may require manual intervention. Typical cases are localization strings printed as the first word in a footnote (which is usually treated as the beginning of a paragaph as far as capitalization is concerned, but \tex is not in vertical mode at this point) or punctuation after periods which are not really end"=of"=sentence periods (for example, after an ellipsis like «[\dots\unkern]» a command such as \cmd{addperiod} would do nothing since parentheses and brackets are transparent to the punctuation tracker). In such cases, use the following commands in bibliography and citation styles to mark the beginning or middle of a sentence if and where required:
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \csitem{bibsentence}
 
-This command marks the beginning of a sentence. A bibliography string immediately after this command will be capitalized and the punctuation tracker is reset, \ie this command hides all preceding punctuation marks from the punctuation tracker and enforces capitalization.
+This command marks the beginning of a sentence. A localization string immediately after this command will be capitalized and the punctuation tracker is reset, \ie this command hides all preceding punctuation marks from the punctuation tracker and enforces capitalization.
 
 \csitem{midsentence}
 
-This command marks the middle of a sentence. A bibliography string immediately after this command will not be capitalized and the punctuation tracker is reset, \ie this command hides all preceding punctuation marks from the punctuation tracker and suppresses capitalization.
+This command marks the middle of a sentence. A localization string immediately after this command will not be capitalized and the punctuation tracker is reset, \ie this command hides all preceding punctuation marks from the punctuation tracker and suppresses capitalization.
 
 \csitem*{midsentence*}
 
@@ -5911,17 +6328,17 @@ The starred variant of \cmd{midsentence} differs from the regular one in that a
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
-\subsection{Bibliography Strings}
+\subsection{Localization Strings}
 \label{aut:str}
 
-Bibliography strings are key terms such as <edition> or <volume> which are automatically translated by \sty{biblatex}'s localization modules. See \secref{aut:lng} for an overview and \secref{aut:lng:key} for a list of all strings supported by default. The commands in this section are used to print the localized term.
+Localization strings are key terms such as <edition> or <volume> which are automatically translated by \sty{biblatex}'s localization modules. See \secref{aut:lng} for an overview and \secref{aut:lng:key} for a list of all strings supported by default. The commands in this section are used to print the localized term.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \cmditem{bibstring}[wrapper]{key}
 
-Prints the bibliography string \prm{key}, where \prm{key} is an identifier in lowercase letters (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). The string will be capitalized as required, see \secref{aut:pct:cfg} for details. 
-Depending on the \opt{abbreviate} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre}, \cmd{bibstring} prints the short or the long version of the string. If bibliography strings are nested, \ie if \cmd{bibstring} is used in another string, it will behave like \cmd{bibxstring}.
+Prints the localization string \prm{key}, where \prm{key} is an identifier in lowercase letters (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). The string will be capitalized as required, see \secref{aut:pct:cfg} for details. 
+Depending on the \opt{abbreviate} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}, \cmd{bibstring} prints the short or the long version of the string. If localization strings are nested, \ie if \cmd{bibstring} is used in another string, it will behave like \cmd{bibxstring}.
 If the \prm{wrapper} argument is given, the string is passed to the \prm{wrapper} for formatting. This is intended for font commands such as \cmd{emph}.
 
 \cmditem{biblstring}[wrapper]{key}
@@ -5970,7 +6387,7 @@ Similar to \cmd{bibsstring} but the whole term is lowercased.
 
 \cmditem{bibxstring}{key}
 
-A simplified but expandable version of \cmd{bibstring}. Note that this variant does not capitalize automatically, nor does it hook into the punctuation tracker. It is intended for special cases in which strings are nested or an expanded bibliography string is required in a test.
+A simplified but expandable version of \cmd{bibstring}. Note that this variant does not capitalize automatically, nor does it hook into the punctuation tracker. It is intended for special cases in which strings are nested or an expanded localization string is required in a test.
 
 \cmditem{bibxlstring}[wrapper]{key}
 
@@ -5996,7 +6413,7 @@ The user"=level versions of the localization commands were already introduced in
 
 \cmditem{DeclareBibliographyStrings}{definitions}
 
-This command is only available in \file{lbx} files. It is used to define bibliography strings. The \prm{definitions} consist of \keyval pairs which assign an expression to an identifier. A complete list of all keys supported by default is given is \secref{aut:lng:key}. Note that the syntax of the value is different in \file{lbx} files. The value assigned to a key consists of two expressions, each of which is wrapped in an additional pair of brackets. This is best shown by example:
+This command is only available in \file{lbx} files. It is used to define localization strings. The \prm{definitions} consist of \keyval pairs which assign an expression to an identifier. A complete list of all keys supported by default is given is \secref{aut:lng:key}. Note that the syntax of the value is different in \file{lbx} files. The value assigned to a key consists of two expressions, each of which is wrapped in an additional pair of brackets. This is best shown by example:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
@@ -6007,7 +6424,7 @@ This command is only available in \file{lbx} files. It is used to define bibliog
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-The first value is the long, written out expression, the second one is an abbreviated or short form. Both strings must always be given even though they may be identical if an expression is always (or never) abbreviated. Depending on the setting of the \opt{abbreviate} package option (see \secref{use:opt:pre}), \sty{biblatex} selects one expression when loading the \file{lbx} file. There is also a special key named \texttt{inherit} which copies the strings from a different language. This is intended for languages which only differ in a few expressions, such as German and Austrian or American and British English. For example, here are the complete definitions for Austrian:
+The first value is the long, written out expression, the second one is an abbreviated or short form. Both strings must always be given even though they may be identical if an expression is always (or never) abbreviated. Depending on the setting of the \opt{abbreviate} package option (see \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}), \sty{biblatex} selects one expression when loading the \file{lbx} file. There is also a special key named \texttt{inherit} which copies the strings from a different language. This is intended for languages which only differ in a few expressions, such as German and Austrian or American and British English. For example, here are the complete definitions for Austrian:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
@@ -6031,7 +6448,7 @@ Note the handling of abbreviation dots, the spacing in abbreviated expressions,
 
 \cmditem{InheritBibliographyStrings}{language}
 
-This command is only available in \file{lbx} files. It copies the bibliography strings for \prm{language} to the current language, as specified by the name of the \file{lbx} file.
+This command is only available in \file{lbx} files. It copies the localization strings for \prm{language} to the current language, as specified by the name of the \file{lbx} file.
 
 \cmditem{DeclareBibliographyExtras}{code}
 
@@ -6051,7 +6468,7 @@ This command corresponds to \cmd{DefineHyphenationExceptions} from \secref{use:l
 
 \cmditem{DeclareRedundantLanguages}{language, language, ...}{babel, babel, ...}
 
-This command provides the language mappings required by the \opt{clearlang} option from \secref{use:opt:pre}.
+This command provides the language mappings required by the \opt{clearlang} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 The \prm{language} is the string given in the \bibfield{language} field (without the optional \texttt{lang} prefix); \prm{babel} is \sty{babel}'s language identifier, as given in the optional argument of \cmd{usepackage} when loading \sty{babel}. This command may be used in \file{lbx} files or in the document preamble. Here are some examples:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
@@ -6061,7 +6478,7 @@ The \prm{language} is the string given in the \bibfield{language} field (without
 	canadian,australian,newzealand,USenglish,UKenglish}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Note that this feature needs to be enabled globally with the \opt{clearlang} option from \secref{use:opt:pre}. If it is disabled, all mappings will be ignored. If the \prm{babel} parameter is blank, \sty{biblatex} will clear the mappings for the corresponding \prm{language}, \ie the feature will be disabled for this \prm{language} only.
+Note that this feature needs to be enabled globally with the \opt{clearlang} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. If it is disabled, all mappings will be ignored. If the \prm{babel} parameter is blank, \sty{biblatex} will clear the mappings for the corresponding \prm{language}, \ie the feature will be disabled for this \prm{language} only.
 
 \cmditem{DeclareLanguageMapping}{language}{file}
 
@@ -6069,7 +6486,7 @@ This command maps a \sty{babel} language identifier to an \file{lbx} file. The \
 
 \cmditem{NewBibliographyString}{key}
 
-This command, which may be used in the preamble (including \file{cbx} and \file{bbx} files) as well as in \file{lbx} files, declares new bibliography strings, \ie it initializes a new \prm{key} to be used in the \prm{definitions} of \cmd{DefineBibliographyStrings}. The \prm{key} argument may also be a comma"=separated list of key names. The keys listed in \secref{aut:lng:key} are defined by default.
+This command, which may be used in the preamble (including \file{cbx} and \file{bbx} files) as well as in \file{lbx} files, declares new localization strings, \ie it initializes a new \prm{key} to be used in the \prm{definitions} of \cmd{DefineBibliographyStrings}. The \prm{key} argument may also be a comma"=separated list of key names. The keys listed in \secref{aut:lng:key} are defined by default.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -6587,7 +7004,7 @@ This section corresponds to \secref{use:fmt} in the user part of this manual. Bi
 \subsubsection{User-definable Commands and Hooks}
 \label{aut:fmt:fmt}
 
-This section corresponds to \secref{use:fmt:fmt} in the user part of the manual. The commands and hooks discussed here are meant to be redefined by users, but bibliography and citation styles may provide a default definition which is different from the package default. These commands are defined in \path{biblatex.def} to make it easier to look up the package defaults. Note that all commands starting with \cmd{mk\dots} take one mandatory argument.
+This section corresponds to \secref{use:fmt:fmt} in the user part of the manual. The commands and hooks discussed here are meant to be redefined by users, but bibliography and citation styles may provide a default definition which is different from the package default. These commands are defined in \path{biblatex.def}. Note that all commands starting with \cmd{mk\dots} take one mandatory argument.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -6629,7 +7046,7 @@ The extra delimiter to be printed after the first name in a name list (in additi
 
 \csitem{andothersdelim}
 
-The delimiter to be printed before the bibliography string <\texttt{andothers}> if a name list like \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor} is truncated. This command should be incorporated in all formatting directives for name lists.
+The delimiter to be printed before the localization string <\texttt{andothers}> if a name list like \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor} is truncated. This command should be incorporated in all formatting directives for name lists.
 
 \csitem{multilistdelim}
 
@@ -6641,7 +7058,7 @@ Use this command instead of \cmd{multilistdelim} before the final item in a lite
 
 \csitem{andmoredelim}
 
-The delimiter to be printed before the bibliography string <\texttt{andmore}> if a literal list like \bibfield{publisher} or \bibfield{location} is truncated. This command should be incorporated in all formatting directives for literal lists.
+The delimiter to be printed before the localization string <\texttt{andmore}> if a literal list like \bibfield{publisher} or \bibfield{location} is truncated. This command should be incorporated in all formatting directives for literal lists.
 
 \csitem{multicitedelim}
 
@@ -6856,7 +7273,7 @@ This command takes an integer argument and prints it as a month name. Even thoug
 
 \cmditem{mkdatezeros}{integer}
 
-This command strips leading zeros from a number or preserves them, depending on the \opt{datezeros} package option (\secref{use:opt:pre}). It is intended for use in the definition of date formatting macros.
+This command strips leading zeros from a number or preserves them, depending on the \opt{datezeros} package option (\secref{use:opt:pre:gen}). It is intended for use in the definition of date formatting macros.
 
 \cmditem{stripzeros}{integer}
 
@@ -7114,10 +7531,10 @@ When defining \cmd{bbx@xref}, the \prm{precode}, \prm{postcode}, and \prm{sepcod
 }
 \end{ltxexample}
 
-\subsubsection{Reference Sets}
+\subsubsection{Entry Sets}
 \label{aut:cav:set}
 
-Reference sets have already been introduced in \secref{use:use:set}. This section discusses how to process reference sets in a bibliography style. Handling them is surprisingly simple. You will normally use the \cmd{entryset} command from \secref{aut:bib:dat} to loop over all set members (in the order in which they are listed in the \bibfield{entryset} field of the \bibtype{set} entry) and append \cmd{finentry} at the end. That's it. The formatting is handled by the drivers for the entry types of the individual set members:
+Entry sets have already been introduced in \secref{use:use:set}. This section discusses how to process entry sets in a bibliography style. From the perspective of the driver, there is no difference between static and dynamic entry sets. Both types are handled in the same way. You will normally use the \cmd{entryset} command from \secref{aut:bib:dat} to loop over all set members (in the order in which they are listed in the \bibfield{entryset} field of the \bibtype{set} entry, or in the order in which they were passed to \cmd{defbibentryset}, respectively) and append \cmd{finentry} at the end. That's it. The formatting is handled by the drivers for the entry types of the individual set members:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareBibliographyDriver{set}{%
@@ -7136,7 +7553,7 @@ You may have noticed that the \texttt{numeric} styles which ship with this packa
   \finentry}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-The \bibfield{entrysetcount} field holds an integer indicating the position of a set member in the reference set. The conversion of this number to a letter or some other marker is handled by the formatting directive of the \bibfield{entrysetcount} field. All the driver needs to do is print the field and add some white space (or start a new line). Printing the markers in citations works in a similar way. Where a numeric style normally says |\printfield{labelnumber}|, you simply append the \bibfield{entrysetcount} field:
+The \bibfield{entrysetcount} field holds an integer indicating the position of a set member in the entry set. The conversion of this number to a letter or some other marker is handled by the formatting directive of the \bibfield{entrysetcount} field. All the driver needs to do is print the field and add some white space (or start a new line). Printing the markers in citations works in a similar way. Where a numeric style normally says |\printfield{labelnumber}|, you simply append the \bibfield{entrysetcount} field:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \printfield{labelnumber}<<\printfield{entrysetcount}>>
@@ -7274,7 +7691,7 @@ We still need to handle cases in which there is no series information at all, so
      \printfield{number}}}%
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-One final hint: bibliography strings are not literal text as far as the punctuation tracker is concerned. Since \cmd{bibstring} and similar commands interface with the punctuation tracker, there is no need to wrap them in a \cmd{printtext} command.
+One final hint: localization strings are not literal text as far as the punctuation tracker is concerned. Since \cmd{bibstring} and similar commands interface with the punctuation tracker, there is no need to wrap them in a \cmd{printtext} command.
 
 \paragraph{Advanced Usage}
 
@@ -7390,7 +7807,7 @@ External abstracts and annotations have been discussed in \secref{use:use:prf}.
 \newcommand*{<<\bibabstractprefix>>}{bibabstract-}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-If the \bibfield{abstract}\slash \bibfield{annotation} field is undefined, the above code tries to load the abstracts\slash annotations from an external file. The \cmd{printfile} commands also incorporate file name prefixes which may be redefined by users. Note that you must enable \cmd{printfile} explicitly by setting the \opt{loadfiles} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre}. This feature is disabled by default for performance reasons.
+If the \bibfield{abstract}\slash \bibfield{annotation} field is undefined, the above code tries to load the abstracts\slash annotations from an external file. The \cmd{printfile} commands also incorporate file name prefixes which may be redefined by users. Note that you must enable \cmd{printfile} explicitly by setting the \opt{loadfiles} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. This feature is disabled by default for performance reasons.
 
 \subsubsection{Custom Localization Modules}
 \label{aut:cav:lng}
@@ -7473,21 +7890,82 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 
 \begin{changelog}
 
+\begin{release}{1.1}{2011-01-05}
+\item Added option \opt{maxbibnames}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{minbibnames}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{maxcitenames}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{mincitenames}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Fixed \kvopt{idemtracker}{strict} and \kvopt{idemtracker}{constrict}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+\item Added option \opt{mergedate} to bibliography style \texttt{authoryear}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+\item Added support for \opt{prefixnumbers} to bibliography style \texttt{alphabetic}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+\item Made option \bibfield{useprefix} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \bibfield{useauthor} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \bibfield{useeditor} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{usetranslator} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{skipbib} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{skiplos} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{skiplab} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{dataonly} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:bib}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{labelalpha} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:pre:int}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{labelnumber} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+\item Made option \opt{labelyear} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:pre:int}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{singletitle} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:pre:int}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{uniquename} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:pre:int}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Made option \opt{indexing} settable on a per-type basis\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Made option \opt{indexing} settable on a per-entry basis\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Extended \cmd{ExecuteBibliographyOptions}\see{use:cfg:opt}
+\item Added \cmd{citedate}\see{use:cit:txt}
+\item Improved static entry sets\see{use:use:set}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Introducing dynamic entry sets\see{use:use:set}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{defbibentryset}\see{use:bib:set}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added option \opt{mcite}\see{use:opt:ldt}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \sty{mcite}\slash\sty{mciteplus}-like commands\see{use:cit:mct}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{sortalphaothers}\see{use:fmt:fmt}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Extended \cmd{DeclareNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Extended \cmd{DeclareIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Extended \cmd{DeclareListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Extended \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Extended \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Extended \cmd{DeclareIndexFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareNameFormat*}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareIndexNameFormat*}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareListFormat*}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat*}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat*}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareIndexFieldFormat*}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+\item Introducing configurable sorting schemes\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme}\see{aut:ctm:srt}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{DeclarePresort}\see{aut:ctm:srt}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareSortExclusion}\see{aut:ctm:srt}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareLabelname}\see{aut:ctm:fld}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareLabelyear}\see{aut:ctm:fld}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Improved special field \bibfield{labelname}\see{aut:bbx:fld}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Improved special field \bibfield{labelyear}\see{aut:bbx:fld}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{entrydata*}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+\item Added \cmd{RequireBiber}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+\item Added option \opt{check} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
+\item Added option \opt{check} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+\item Added \cmd{defbibcheck}\see{use:bib:flt}
+\item Updated support for Portuguese (José Carlos Santos)
+\item Fixed conflict with \sty{titletoc}
+\item Fixed some bugs
+\end{release}
+
 \begin{release}{1.0}{2010-11-19}
 \item First officially stable release
-\item Renamed option \kvopt{bibencoding}{inputenc} to \kvopt{bibencoding}{auto}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Made \kvopt{bibencoding}{auto} the package default\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{backend}{bibtexu}\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Renamed option \kvopt{bibencoding}{inputenc} to \kvopt{bibencoding}{auto}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Made \kvopt{bibencoding}{auto} the package default\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{backend}{bibtexu}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 \item Slightly updated documentation\see{bib:cav:enc}
-\item Updated support for Dutch (Alexander van Loon)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Updated support for Italian (Andrea Marchitelli)\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Updated support for Dutch (Alexander van Loon)
+\item Updated support for Italian (Andrea Marchitelli)
 \end{release}
 
 \begin{release}{0.9e}{2010-10-09}
 \item Updated and expanded manual\see{bib:cav:enc}
-\item Added option \opt{sortupper}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{sortlocale}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{backrefsetstyle}\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Added option \opt{sortupper}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{sortlocale}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{backrefsetstyle}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 \item Added \cmd{bibpagerefpunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
 \item Added \cmd{backtrackertrue} and \cmd{backtrackerfalse}\see{aut:aux:msc}
 \item Disable back reference tracking in \acr{TOC}/\acr{LOT}/\acr{LOF}\see{aut:cav:flt}
@@ -7499,16 +7977,16 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Added workaround for \sty{hyperref} space factor issue
 \item Added workaround for \sty{xkeyval}'s flawed class option inheritance
 \item Added workaround for \sty{fancyvrb}'s flawed brute-force \cmd{VerbatimFootnotes}
-\item Removed option \kvopt{date}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Removed option \kvopt{urldate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Removed option \kvopt{origdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Removed option \kvopt{eventdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Removed option \kvopt{alldates}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{date}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{urldate}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{origdate}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{eventdate}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{alldates}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Removed option \kvopt{date}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Removed option \kvopt{urldate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Removed option \kvopt{origdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Removed option \kvopt{eventdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Removed option \kvopt{alldates}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{date}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{urldate}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{origdate}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{eventdate}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{alldates}{iso8601}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 \end{release}
 
 \begin{release}{0.9c}{2010-08-29}
@@ -7516,8 +7994,8 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Added field alias \bibfield{archiveprefix}\see{bib:fld:als}
 \item Added field alias \bibfield{primaryclass}\see{bib:fld:als}
 \item Updated documentation\see{use:use:epr}
-\item Tweaked package option \kvopt{babel}{other*}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Updated support for Brazilian (Mateus Araújo)\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Tweaked package option \kvopt{babel}{other*}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Updated support for Brazilian (Mateus Araújo)
 \item Fixed some bugs
 \end{release}
 
@@ -7529,15 +8007,15 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Added option \opt{citepages} to all \texttt{verbose} citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
 \item Added support for prefixes to all \texttt{numeric} citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
 \item Added support for prefixes to all \texttt{numeric} bibliography styles\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Renamed package option \opt{defernums} to \opt{defernumbers}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{sortcase}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{dateabbrev}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{date}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{urldate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{origdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{eventdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{alldates}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{clearlang}\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Renamed package option \opt{defernums} to \opt{defernumbers}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{sortcase}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{dateabbrev}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{date}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{urldate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{origdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{eventdate}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{alldates}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{clearlang}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 \item Added option \opt{prefixnumbers} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
 \item Added option \opt{resetnumbers} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
 \item Added option \opt{omitnumbers} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
@@ -7583,7 +8061,7 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Modified citation style \texttt{authortitle-tcomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
 \item Modified citation style \texttt{draft}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
 \item Modified citation style \texttt{debug}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added option \opt{bibwarn}\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Added option \opt{bibwarn}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 \item Added \cmd{printbibheading}\see{use:bib:bib}
 \item Added option \opt{env} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
 \item Added option \opt{env} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
@@ -7595,8 +8073,8 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
 \item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:env}
 \item Added \cmd{intitlepunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added option \opt{parentracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added option \opt{maxparens}\see{use:opt:int}
+\item Added option \opt{parentracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+\item Added option \opt{maxparens}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
 \item Added counter \cnt{parenlevel}\see{aut:aux:tst}
 \item Added \cmd{parentext}\see{use:cit:txt}
 \item Added \cmd{brackettext}\see{use:cit:txt}
@@ -7613,8 +8091,8 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Added localization key \texttt{backrefpages}\see{aut:lng:key}
 \item Slightly expanded documentation\see{bib:use:dat}
 \item Slightly expanded documentation\see{aut:bbx:fld:dat}
-\item Added support for Finnish (translations by Hannu Väisänen)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Updated support for Greek (translations by Prokopis)\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Added support for Finnish (translations by Hannu Väisänen)
+\item Updated support for Greek (translations by Prokopis)
 
 \end{release}
 
@@ -7644,23 +8122,23 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Added field \bibfield{eventdate}\see{bib:fld:dat}
 \item Removed fields \bibfield{urlday}/\bibfield{urlmonth}/\bibfield{urlyear}\see{bib:fld:dat}
 \item Updated documentation\see{bib:use:dat}
-\item Extended option \opt{date}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Extended option \opt{urldate}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{origdate}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{eventdate}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{alldates}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{datezeros}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{language}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \cnt{notetype}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \cnt{backrefstyle}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Modified option \opt{indexing}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Made option \kvopt{hyperref}{auto} the default\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \kvopt{backend}{biber}\see{use:opt:pre}
+\item Extended option \opt{date}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Extended option \opt{urldate}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{origdate}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{eventdate}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{alldates}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{datezeros}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \opt{language}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \cnt{notetype}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \cnt{backrefstyle}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Modified option \opt{indexing}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Made option \kvopt{hyperref}{auto} the default\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Added option \kvopt{backend}{biber}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 \item Updated documentation\see{bib:cav:enc}
-\item Added option \opt{isbn}\see{use:opt:bbx}
-\item Added option \opt{url}\see{use:opt:bbx}
-\item Added option \opt{doi}\see{use:opt:bbx}
-\item Added option \opt{eprint}\see{use:opt:bbx}
+\item Added option \opt{isbn}\see{use:opt:pre:bbx}
+\item Added option \opt{url}\see{use:opt:pre:bbx}
+\item Added option \opt{doi}\see{use:opt:pre:bbx}
+\item Added option \opt{eprint}\see{use:opt:pre:bbx}
 \item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-comp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
 \item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-icomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
 \item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-tcomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
@@ -7751,854 +8229,854 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Added localization key \texttt{bycollaborator}\see{aut:lng:key}
 \item Added localization key \texttt{inpress}\see{aut:lng:key}
 \item Added localization key \texttt{submitted}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added support for Dutch (translations by Alexander van Loon)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added support for Greek (translations by Apostolos Syropoulos)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added notes on Greek \see{use:loc:grk}
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8i}{2009-09-20}
-
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8h}{2009-08-10}
-
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8g}{2009-08-06}
-
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8f}{2009-07-25}
-
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8e}{2009-07-04}
-
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibordedition}\see{use:fmt:lng}
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibordseries}\see{use:fmt:lng}
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibendnote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added several localization keys related to \texttt{editor}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added several localization keys related to \texttt{translator}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{thiscite}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Removed several \texttt{country...} localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Removed several \texttt{patent...} localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Removed several \texttt{patreq...} localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Updated and clarified documentation\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added support for Brazilian Portuguese (by Augusto Ritter Stoffel)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added preliminary support for Portuguese/Portugal\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added revised Swedish translations (by Per Starbäck)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:nam}
-\item Improved concatenation of editorial and other roles
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8d}{2009-05-30}
-
-\item Removed package option \opt{bibtex8}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{backend}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Slightly modified package option \bibfield{loccittracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added \cmd{volcite} and \cmd{Volcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{pvolcite} and \cmd{Pvolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{fvolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{tvolcite} and \cmd{Tvolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{avolcite} and \cmd{Avolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{notecite} and \cmd{Notecite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{Pnotecite} and \cmd{Pnotecite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{fnotecite}\see{use:cit:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{addabthinspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Disable citation and page trackers in \acr{TOC}/\acr{LOT}/\acr{LOF}\see{aut:cav:flt}
-\item Disable citation and page trackers in floats\see{aut:cav:flt}
-\item Improved on-demand loading of localization modules
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8c}{2009-01-10}
-
-\item Added <idem> tracker\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added package option \opt{idemtracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added \cmd{ifciteidem}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifentryseen}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Improved citation style \texttt{verbose-trad1}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved citation style \texttt{verbose-trad2}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed \len{bibitemextrasep} to \len{bibnamesep}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Slightly modified \len{bibnamesep}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Added \len{bibinitsep}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Increased default value of \cnt{highnamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Increased default value of \cnt{lownamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:loc:us}
-\item Added \cmd{uspunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Added \cmd{stdpunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Added \cmd{midsentence*}\see{aut:pct:ctr}
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8b}{2008-12-13}
-
-\item Added package/entry option \opt{usetranslator}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Added \cmd{ifusetranslator}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Consider \bibfield{translator} when sorting\see{use:srt}
-\item Consider \bibfield{translator} when generating \bibfield{labelname}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added field \bibfield{eventtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Support \bibfield{eventtitle} in \bibtype{proceedings} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Support \bibfield{eventtitle} in \bibtype{inproceedings} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added unsupported entry type \bibtype{commentary}\see{bib:typ:ctm}
-\item Permit \cmd{NewBibliographyString} in \file{lbx} files\see{aut:lng:cmd}
-\item Improved behavior of \cmd{mkbibquote} in <American-punctuation> mode\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8a}{2008-11-29}
-
-\item Updated documentation (important, please read)\see{int:feb}
-\item Added package option \kvopt{hyperref}{auto}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{reading}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Updated \acr{KOMA}-Script support for version 3.x\see{use:cav:scr}
-\item Slightly modified special field \bibfield{fullhash}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{DeclareNumChars*}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{DeclareRangeChars*}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{DeclareRangeCommands*}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{MakeSentenceCase}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareCaseLangs}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Support nested \cmd{mkbibquote} with American punctuation\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Improved \cmd{ifpunctmark}\see{aut:pct:chk}
-\item Improved punctuation tracker\see{aut:pct:pct}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclarePunctuationPairs}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping}\see{aut:lng:cmd}
-\item Added support for custom localization modules\see{aut:cav:lng}
-\item Added extended \pdf bookmarks to this manual
-\item Fixed various bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.8}{2008-10-02}
-
-\item Added \cmd{DefineHyphenationExceptions}\see{use:lng}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareHyphenationExceptions}\see{aut:lng:cmd}
-\item Added \cmd{mkpagetotal}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Improved \acr{KOMA}-Script support\see{use:cav:scr}
-\item Added \cmd{ifkomabibtotoc}\see{use:cav:scr}
-\item Added \cmd{ifkomabibtotocnumbered}\see{use:cav:scr}
-\item Added \cmd{ifmemoirbibintoc}\see{use:cav:mem}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:bib:hdg}
-\item Updated documentation of \cmd{iffootnote}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added several new localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Rearranged some localization keys (\texttt{section} vs. \texttt{paragraph})\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added unsupported entry type \bibtype{letter}\see{bib:typ:ctm}
-\item Added entry type \bibtype{suppbook}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added entry type \bibtype{suppcollection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added entry type \bibtype{suppperiodical}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Support \bibtype{reference} and \bibtype{inreference}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Support \bibtype{review} as an alias\see{bib:typ:ctm}
-\item Added field \bibfield{origpublisher}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field alias \bibfield{annote}\see{bib:fld:als}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:cav:enc}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Removed \cmd{EnableCapitalAfter} and \cmd{DisableCapitalAfter}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Added support for <American-style> punctuation\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareQuotePunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Improved \cmd{mkbibquote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{use:loc:us}
-\item Improved all \texttt{numeric} citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved \texttt{numeric} bibliography style\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{authoryear-ibid}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved all \texttt{authoryear} citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved \texttt{authoryear} bibliography style\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Added \opt{pageref} option to \texttt{verbose-note} style\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added \opt{pageref} option to \texttt{verbose-inote} style\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{reading}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added bibliography style \texttt{reading}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{draft}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added bibliography style \texttt{draft}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Improved \sty{natbib} compatibility style\see{use:cit:nat}
-\item Added \cmd{ifcitation}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifbibliography}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{printfile}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Added package option \opt{loadfiles}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added support for bibliographic data in external files\see{use:use:prf}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:prf}
-\item Modified field \bibfield{edition}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Modified special field \bibfield{labelyear}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Modified special field \bibfield{labelalpha}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added special field \bibfield{extraalpha}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added counter \cnt{maxlabelyear}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added counter \cnt{maxextraalpha}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added \cmd{mknumalph}\see{use:fmt:aux}
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibacro}\see{use:fmt:aux}
-\item Added \cmd{autocap}\see{use:fmt:aux}
-\item Added package option \opt{firstinits}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added \cmd{iffirstinits}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added support for eprint data\see{use:use:epr}
-\item Added support for arXiv\see{use:use:epr}
-\item Expanded documentation \see{aut:cav:epr}
-\item Added field \bibfield{eprint}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{eprinttype}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added eprint support to all standard entry types\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added package option \opt{arxiv}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Introduced concept of a reference set\see{use:use:set}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:set}
-\item Added entry type \bibtype{set}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added field \bibfield{entryset}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Added special field \bibfield{entrysetcount}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added \cmd{entrydata}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:mif}
-\item Added \cmd{entryset}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{strfield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Improved \cmd{usedriver}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{bibpagespunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:pct}
-\item Added entry option \opt{skipbib}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Added entry option \opt{skiplos}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Added entry option \opt{skiplab}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Added entry option \opt{dataonly}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Modified special field \bibfield{namehash}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added special field \bibfield{fullhash}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareNumChars}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareRangeChars}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareRangeCommands}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added support for Swedish (translations by Per Starbäck and others)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Updated various localization files
-\item Various minor improvements throughout
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.7}{2007-12-09}
-
-\item Expanded documentation\see{int:feb}
-\item New dependency on \sty{etoolbox} package\see{int:pre:req}
-\item Made \sty{url} a required package\see{int:pre:req}
-\item Modified package option \opt{sorting}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Introduced concept of an entry option\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Added option \bibfield{useauthor}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Added option \bibfield{useeditor}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Modified option \bibfield{useprefix}\see{use:opt:bib}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{useprefix}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Added field \bibfield{options}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:srt}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-ibid}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-icomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-cterse} to \texttt{authortitle-tcomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-verb} to \texttt{verbose}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-cverb} to \texttt{verbose-ibid}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{verbose-note}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{verbose-inote}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-trad} to \texttt{verbose-trad1}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Removed citation style \texttt{authortitle-strad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{verbose-trad2}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved citation style \texttt{authoryear}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved citation style \texttt{authoryear-comp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-terse}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-tcomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved all verbose citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:fld:typ}
-\item Modified entry type \bibtype{article}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added entry type \bibtype{periodical}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added entry type \bibtype{patent}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry types \bibfield{proceedings} and \bibfield{inproceedings}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibfield{article}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibfield{booklet}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibfield{misc}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added entry type alias \bibtype{electronic}\see{bib:typ:als}
-\item Added new custom types\see{bib:typ:ctm}
-\item Support \bibfield{pagetotal} field where applicable\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added field \bibfield{holder}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{venue}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{version}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{journaltitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{journalsubtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{issuetitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{issuesubtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{journal}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field alias \bibfield{journal}\see{bib:fld:als}
-\item Added field \bibfield{shortjournal}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{shortseries}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{shorthandintro}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{xref}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Added field \bibfield{authortype}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{editortype}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{reprinttitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Improved handling of field \bibfield{type}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Improved handling of field \bibfield{series}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Updated documentation\see{bib:use:ser}
-\item Renamed field \bibfield{id} to \bibfield{eid}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{pagination}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{bookpagination}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added special field \bibfield{sortinit}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Introduced concept of a multicite command\see{use:cit:mlt}
-\item Added \cmd{cites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
-\item Added \cmd{Cites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
-\item Added \cmd{parencites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
-\item Added \cmd{Parencites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
-\item Added \cmd{footcites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
-\item Added \cmd{supercites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
-\item Added \cmd{Autocite}\see{use:cit:aut}
-\item Added \cmd{autocites}\see{use:cit:aut}
-\item Added \cmd{Autocites}\see{use:cit:aut}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareMultiCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Added counter \cnt{multicitecount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added counter \cnt{multicitetotal}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Renamed \cmd{citefulltitle} to \cmd{citetitle*}\see{use:cit:txt}
-\item Added \cmd{cite*}\see{use:cit:cbx}
-\item Added \cmd{citeurl}\see{use:cit:txt}
-\item Added documentation of field \bibfield{nameaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{entrysubtype}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Added field \bibfield{execute}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Added custom fields \bibfield{verb{[a--c]}}\see{bib:fld:ctm}
-\item Added custom fields \bibfield{name{[a--c]}type}\see{bib:fld:ctm}
-\item Consider \bibfield{sorttitle} field when falling back to \bibfield{title}\see{use:srt}
-\item Removed package option \opt{labelctitle}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Removed field \opt{labelctitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added package option \opt{singletitle}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added \cmd{ifsingletitle}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifuseauthor}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifuseeditor}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifopcit}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifloccit}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added package option \opt{uniquename}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added special counter \cnt{uniquename}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added package option \opt{natbib}\see{use:opt:ldt}
-\item Added compatibility commands for the \sty{natbib} package\see{use:cit:nat}
-\item Added package option \opt{defernums}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Improved support for numeric labels\see{use:cav:lab}
-\item Added package option \opt{mincrossrefs}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{bibencoding}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:cav:enc}
-\item Updated documentation\see{bib:cav:ide}
-\item Added package option \opt{citetracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added package option \opt{ibidtracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added package option \bibfield{opcittracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added package option \bibfield{loccittracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Modified package option \opt{pagetracker}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Added \cmd{pagetrackertrue} and \cmd{pagetrackerfalse}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Text commands now exluded from tracking\see{use:cit:txt}
-\item Updated documentation of \cmd{iffirstonpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Updated documentation of \cmd{ifsamepage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Removed package option \opt{keywsort}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{refsection}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{refsegment}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{citereset}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-\item Extended documentation of \env{refsection} environment\see{use:bib:sec}
-\item Added \cmd{newrefsection}\see{use:bib:sec}
-\item Added \cmd{newrefsegment}\see{use:bib:seg}
-\item Added heading definition \texttt{subbibliography}\see{use:bib:hdg}
-\item Added heading definition \texttt{subbibintoc}\see{use:bib:hdg}
-\item Added heading definition \texttt{subbibnumbered}\see{use:bib:hdg}
-\item Make all citation commands scan ahead for punctuation\see{use:cit}
-\item Updated documentation of \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Removed \cmd{usecitecmd}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Updated documentation of \opt{autocite} package option\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Updated documentation of \opt{autopunct} package option\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added \cmd{citereset}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{citereset*}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{mancite}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{citesetup}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{compcitedelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{labelnamepunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{subtitlepunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{finallistdelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{andmoredelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{labelalphaothers}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \len{bibitemextrasep}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Renamed \cmd{blxauxprefix} to \cmd{blxauxsuffix}\see{use:use:aux}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareBibliographyOption}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareEntryOption}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
-\item Renamed \cmd{InitializeBibliographyDrivers} to \cmd{InitializeBibliographyStyle}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
-\item Added \cmd{InitializeCitationStyle}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Added \cmd{OnManualCitation}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Extended documentation of \cmd{DeclareCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareAutoCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Improved \cmd{printtext}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Improved \cmd{printfield}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Improved \cmd{printlist}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Improved \cmd{printnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Improved \cmd{indexfield}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Improved \cmd{indexlist}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Improved \cmd{indexnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareFieldAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareListAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexFieldAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexListAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Improved \cmd{iffirstonpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Improved \cmd{ifciteseen}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Improved \cmd{ifandothers}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifinteger}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifnumeral}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifnumerals}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Removed \cmd{ifpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Removed \cmd{ifpages}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Moved \cmd{ifblank} to \sty{etoolbox} package\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Removed \cmd{xifblank}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Moved \cmd{docsvlist} to \sty{etoolbox} package\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Updated documentation of \cmd{docsvfield}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{ifciteibid}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{iffootnote}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{iffieldxref}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{iflistxref}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifnamexref}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifmoreitems}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifbibstring}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{iffieldbibstring}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{mkpageprefix}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{NumCheckSetup}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{pno}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{ppno}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{nopp}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{ppspace}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{psq}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{psqq}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{sqspace}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:use:pag}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav:pag}
-\item Added \cmd{RN}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{Rn}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{RNfont}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{Rnfont}\see{use:cit:msc}
-\item Added package option \opt{punctfont}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added \cmd{setpunctfont}\see{aut:pct:new}
-\item Added \cmd{resetpunctfont}\see{aut:pct:new}
-\item Added \cmd{nopunct}\see{aut:pct:pct}
-\item Added \cmd{bibxstring}\see{aut:str}
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibemph}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibquote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibfootnote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added \cmd{mkbibsuperscript}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added \cmd{currentfield}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added \cmd{currentlist}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added \cmd{currentname}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added \cmd{AtNextCite}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added \cmd{AtNextCitekey}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added \cmd{AtDataInput}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added several new localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added support for Norwegian (translations by Johannes Wilm)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added support for Danish (translations by Johannes Wilm)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:grp}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:mif}
-\item Numerous improvements under the hood
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.6}{2007-01-06}
-
-\item Added package option \kvopt{sorting}{none}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Renamed package option \kvopt{block}{penalty} to \kvopt{block}{ragged}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{origlanguage} back to field\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Support \bibfield{origlanguage} field if \bibfield{translator} is present\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Renamed field \bibfield{articleid} to \bibfield{id}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Support \bibfield{id} field in \bibfield{article} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Support \bibfield{series} field in \bibfield{article} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Support \bibfield{doi} field\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Updated documentation of all entry types\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{series}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{redactor}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{shortauthor}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{shorteditor}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Improved support for corporate authors and editors\see{bib:use:inc}
-\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelname}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added field alias \bibfield{key}\see{bib:fld:als}
-\item Added package option \opt{autocite}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{autopunct}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added \cmd{autocite}\see{use:cit:aut}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareAutoCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
-\item Added option \opt{filter} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added \cmd{defbibfilter}\see{use:bib:flt}
-\item Added package option \opt{maxitems}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{minitems}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-\item Added counter \cnt{maxitems}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added counter \cnt{minitems}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added adapted headings for \sty{scrartcl}, \sty{scrbook}, \sty{scrreprt}\see{int:pre:cmp}
-\item Added adapted headings for \sty{memoir}\see{int:pre:cmp}
-\item Added \cmd{Cite}\see{use:cit:std}
-\item Added \cmd{Parencite}\see{use:cit:std}
-\item Added \cmd{Textcite}\see{use:cit:cbx}
-\item Added \cmd{parencite*}\see{use:cit:cbx}
-\item Added \cmd{supercite}\see{use:cit:cbx}
-\item Added \cmd{Citeauthor}\see{use:cit:txt}
-\item Added \cmd{nameyeardelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{multilistdelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Completed documenation\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Completed documenation\see{aut:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{usecitecmd}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
-\item Added \cmd{hyphenate}\see{use:fmt:aux}
-\item Added \cmd{hyphen}\see{use:fmt:aux}
-\item Added \cmd{nbhyphen}\see{use:fmt:aux}
-\item Improved \cmd{ifsamepage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Removed \cmd{ifnameequalstr}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Removed \cmd{iflistequalstr}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifcapital}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{MakeCapital}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added starred variant to \cmd{setunit}\see{aut:pct:new}
-\item Improved \cmd{ifterm}\see{aut:pct:chk}
-\item Straightened out documentation of \cmd{thelist}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Straightened out documentation of \cmd{thename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{docsvfield}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{docsvlist}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Removed \cmd{CopyFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Removed \cmd{CopyIndexFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Removed \cmd{CopyListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Removed \cmd{CopyIndexListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Removed \cmd{CopyNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Removed \cmd{CopyIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{savefieldformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{restorefieldformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{savelistformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{restorelistformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{savenameformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{restorenameformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{savebibmacro}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{restorebibmacro}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{savecommand}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{restorecommand}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added documentation of \texttt{shorthands} driver\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
-\item Rearranged, renamed, and extended localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Renamed counter \cnt{citecount} to \cnt{instcount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added new counter \cnt{citecount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Added counter \cnt{citetotal}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Rearranged and expanded documentation\see{bib:use}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:cav}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav:scr}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav:mem}
-\item Completed support for Spanish\see{use:loc:esp}
-\item Added support for Italian (translations by Enrico Gregorio)\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added language alias \opt{australian}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Added language alias \opt{newzealand}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Various minor improvements throughout
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.5}{2006-11-12}
-
-\item Added \cmd{usedriver}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added package option \opt{pagetracker}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added \cmd{iffirstonpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifsamepage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Corrected documentation of \cmd{ifciteseen}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added package option \opt{terseinits}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Modified default value of package option \opt{maxnames}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Renamed package option \opt{index} to \opt{indexing}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Extended package option \opt{indexing}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Removed package option \opt{citeindex}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Removed package option \opt{bibindex}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{labelalpha}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelalpha}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added package option \opt{labelctitle}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelctitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added package option \opt{labelnumber}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelnumber}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added package option \opt{labelyear}\see{use:opt:int}
-\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelyear}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-verb}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-cverb}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{traditional} to \texttt{authortitle-trad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-trad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-strad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{authoryear}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{authortitle}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-\item Renamed \env{bibsection} to \env{refsection} (conflict with \sty{memoir})\see{use:bib:sec}
-\item Renamed \env{bibsegment} to \env{refsegment} (consistency)\see{use:bib:seg}
-\item Extended \env{refsection} environment\see{use:bib:sec}
-\item Renamed \env{bibsection} counter to \env{refsection}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Renamed \env{bibsegment} counter to \env{refsegment}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:use:mlt}
-\item Added counter \cnt{citecount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Modified default definition of \cmd{blxauxprefix}\see{use:use:aux}
-\item Added \cmd{CopyFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{CopyIndexFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{CopyListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{CopyIndexListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{CopyNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{CopyIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added \cmd{clearfield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{clearlist}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{clearname}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{restorefield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{restorelist}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{restorename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Renamed \cmd{bibhyperlink} to \cmd{bibhyperref}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added new command \cmd{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{bibhypertarget}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Renamed formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperlink} to \texttt{bibhyperref}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added new formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added formatting directive \texttt{bibhypertarget}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added \cmd{addlpthinspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{addhpthinspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Added field \bibfield{annotator}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{commentator}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{introduction}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{foreword}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{afterword}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{translator}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{articleid}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{doi}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{file}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field alias \bibfield{pdf}\see{bib:fld:als}
-\item Added field \bibfield{indextitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{indexsorttitle}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{language}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{origlanguage}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{book}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{collection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{inbook}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{incollection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibfield{misc}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added \cmd{UndefineBibliographyExtras}\see{use:lng}
-\item Added \cmd{UndeclareBibliographyExtras}\see{aut:lng:cmd}
-\item Added \cmd{finalandcomma}\see{use:fmt:lng}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{citedas}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Renamed localization key \texttt{editby} to \texttt{edited}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Renamed localization key \texttt{transby} to \texttt{translated}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{annotated}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{commented}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{introduced}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{foreworded}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{afterworded}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{commentary}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{annotations}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{introduction}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{foreword}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{afterword}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{doneby}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{itemby}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{spanish}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{latin}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{greek}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Modified localization key \texttt{fromenglish}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Modified localization key \texttt{fromfrench}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Modified localization key \texttt{fromgerman}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{fromspanish}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{fromlatin}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Added localization key \texttt{fromgreek}\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:use}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:xbx:bbx}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Updated documentation\see{aut:fmt:fmt}
-\item Updated and completed documentation\see{use:fmt:lng}
-\item Updated and completed documentation\see{aut:fmt:lng}
-\item Added support for Spanish (translations by Ignacio Fernández Galván)
-\item Various memory-related optimizations in \path{biblatex.bst}
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.4}{2006-10-01}
-
-\item Added package option \opt{sortlos}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{bibtex8}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Made \bibfield{pageref} field local to \env{refsection} environment\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Renamed field \bibfield{labeltitle} to \bibfield{labelctitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added new field \bibfield{labeltitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added new field \bibfield{sortkey}\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Updated documentation\see{use:srt}
-\item Removed \cmd{iffieldtrue}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Renamed counter \cnt{namepenalty} to \cnt{highnamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Added counter \cnt{lownamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{noligature}\see{use:fmt:aux}
-\item Added \cmd{addlowpenspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{addhighpenspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{addabbrvspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{adddotspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Added \cmd{addslash}\see{aut:pct:spc}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav}
-\item Various minor improvements throughout
-\item Fixed some bugs
+\item Added support for Dutch (translations by Alexander van Loon)
+\item Added support for Greek (translations by Apostolos Syropoulos)
+\item Added notes on Greek\see{use:loc:grk}
 
 \end{release}
 
-\begin{release}{0.3}{2006-09-24}
-
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle} to \texttt{authortitle-terse}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-comp} to \texttt{authortitle-cterse}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-verb} to \texttt{authortitle}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added new citation style \texttt{authortitle-comp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Citation style \texttt{traditional} now supports <loc.~cit.>\see{use:xbx:cbx}
-\item Added package option \opt{date}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{urldate}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Introduced new data type: literal lists\see{bib:fld}
-\item Renamed \cmd{citename} to \cmd{citeauthor}\see{use:cit:txt}
-\item Renamed \cmd{citelist} to \cmd{citename}\see{use:cit:low}
-\item Added new \cmd{citelist} command\see{use:cit:low}
-\item Renamed \cmd{printlist} to \cmd{printnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Added new \cmd{printlist} command\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Renamed \cmd{indexlist} to \cmd{indexnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Added new \cmd{indexlist} command\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareListFormat} to \cmd{DeclareNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added new \cmd{DeclareListFormat} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareListAlias} to \cmd{DeclareNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added new \cmd{DeclareListAlias} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat} to \cmd{DeclareIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added new \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareIndexListAlias} to \cmd{DeclareIndexNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Added new \cmd{DeclareIndexListAlias} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
-\item Renamed \cmd{biblist} to \cmd{thename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added new \cmd{thelist} command\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Renamed \cmd{bibfield} to \cmd{thefield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Renamed \cmd{savelist} to \cmd{savename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added new \cmd{savelist} command\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Renamed \cmd{savelistcs} to \cmd{savenamecs}\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Added new \cmd{savelistcs} command\see{aut:aux:dat}
-\item Renamed \cmd{iflistundef} to \cmd{ifnameundef}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added new \cmd{iflistundef} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Renamed \cmd{iflistsequal} to \cmd{ifnamesequal}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added new \cmd{iflistsequal} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Renamed \cmd{iflistequals} to \cmd{ifnameequals}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added new \cmd{iflistequals} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Renamed \cmd{iflistequalcs} to \cmd{ifnameequalcs}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added new \cmd{iflistequalcs} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Renamed \cmd{iflistequalstr} to \cmd{ifnameequalstr}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added new \cmd{iflistequalstr} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Renamed \cmd{ifcurrentlist} to \cmd{ifcurrentname}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added new \cmd{ifcurrentlist} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Entry type alias \bibtype{conference} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
-\item Entry type alias \bibtype{mastersthesis} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
-\item Entry type alias \bibtype{phdthesis} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
-\item Entry type alias \bibtype{techreport} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
-\item Entry type alias \bibtype{www} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
-\item Added new custom fields \bibfield{lista} through \bibfield{listf}\see{bib:fld:ctm}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{location}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{origlocation}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{publisher}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{institution}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Changed data type of \bibfield{organization}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Modified values of \bibfield{gender} field for \sty{jurabib} compatibility\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Modified and extended \texttt{idem\dots} keys for \sty{jurabib} compatibility\see{aut:lng:key}
-\item Improved \cmd{addtocategory}\see{use:bib:cat}
-\item Removed formatting command \cmd{mkshorthand}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{shorthandwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{shorthandwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Removed formatting command \cmd{mklabelnumber}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{labelnumberwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{labelnumberwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Removed formatting command \cmd{mklabelalpha}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
-\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{labelalphawidth}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{labelalphawidth}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
-\item Renamed \cmd{bibitem} to \cmd{thebibitem}\see{aut:bbx:env}
-\item Renamed \cmd{lositem} to \cmd{thelositem}\see{aut:bbx:env}
-\item Modified \cmd{AtBeginBibliography}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added \cmd{AtBeginShorthands}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added \cmd{AtEveryLositem}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Extended \sty{showkeys} compatibility to list of shorthands\see{int:pre:cmp}
-\item Added compatibility code for the \sty{hyperref} package\see{int:pre:cmp}
-\item Added package option \opt{hyperref}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added package option \opt{backref}\see{use:opt:pre}
-\item Added field \bibfield{pageref}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Added \cmd{ifhyperref}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added \cmd{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:aux:msc}
-\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
-\item Renamed \cmd{ifandothers} to \cmd{ifmorenames}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added new \cmd{ifandothers} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{moreauthor}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{morebookauthor}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{moreeditor}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{morelabelname}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{moretranslator}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{morenamea}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{morenameb}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Removed field \bibfield{morenamec}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
-\item Updated documentation\see{aut:int}
-\item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
-\item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:env}
-\item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:drv}
-\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:fmt}
-\item Modified internal \bibtex interface
-\item Fixed some typos in the manual
-\item Fixed some bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.2}{2006-09-06}
-
-\item Added bibliography categories\see{use:bib:cat}
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareBibliographyCategory}\see{use:bib:cat}
-\item Added \cmd{addtocategory}\see{use:bib:cat}
-\item Added \texttt{category} and \texttt{notcategory} filters\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added usage examples for bibliography categories\see{use:use:div}
-\item Added documentation of configuration file\see{use:cfg:cfg}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{ExecuteBibliographyOptions}\see{use:cfg:opt}
-\item Added documentation of \cmd{AtBeginBibliography}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added \cmd{AtEveryBibitem}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added \cmd{AtEveryCite}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added \cmd{AtEveryCitekey}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
-\item Added optional argument to \cmd{printtext}\see{aut:bib:dat}
-\item Added \cmd{ifpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added \cmd{ifpages}\see{aut:aux:tst}
-\item Added field \bibfield{titleaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{booktitleaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{maintitleaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{library}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{part}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{origlocation}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{origtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{origyear}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Added field \bibfield{origlanguage}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Modified profile of field \bibfield{language}\see{bib:fld:dat}
-\item Extended entry type \bibtype{book}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibtype{inbook}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibtype{collection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibtype{incollection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibtype{proceedings}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Extended entry type \bibtype{inproceedings}\see{bib:typ:blx}
-\item Added entry type alias \bibtype{www}\see{bib:typ:als}
-\item Added compatibility code for the \sty{showkeys} package\see{int:pre:cmp}
-\item Support printable characters in \bibfield{keyword} and \texttt{notkeyword} filters\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Support printable characters in \bibfield{keywords} field\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Ignore spaces after commas in \bibfield{keywords} field\see{bib:fld:spc}
-\item Internal rearrangement of all bibliography styles
-\item Fixed various bugs
-
-\end{release}
-
-\begin{release}{0.1}{2006-09-02}
-
-\item Initial public release
-
-\end{release}
+%\begin{release}{0.8i}{2009-09-20}
+%
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8h}{2009-08-10}
+%
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8g}{2009-08-06}
+%
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8f}{2009-07-25}
+%
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8e}{2009-07-04}
+%
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibordedition}\see{use:fmt:lng}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibordseries}\see{use:fmt:lng}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibendnote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added several localization keys related to \texttt{editor}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added several localization keys related to \texttt{translator}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{thiscite}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Removed several \texttt{country...} localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Removed several \texttt{patent...} localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Removed several \texttt{patreq...} localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Updated and clarified documentation\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added support for Brazilian Portuguese (by Augusto Ritter Stoffel)
+%\item Added preliminary support for Portuguese/Portugal\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added revised Swedish translations (by Per Starbäck)\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:nam}
+%\item Improved concatenation of editorial and other roles
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8d}{2009-05-30}
+%
+%\item Removed package option \opt{bibtex8}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{backend}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Slightly modified package option \bibfield{loccittracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added \cmd{volcite} and \cmd{Volcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{pvolcite} and \cmd{Pvolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{fvolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{tvolcite} and \cmd{Tvolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{avolcite} and \cmd{Avolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{notecite} and \cmd{Notecite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{Pnotecite} and \cmd{Pnotecite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{fnotecite}\see{use:cit:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{addabthinspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Disable citation and page trackers in \acr{TOC}/\acr{LOT}/\acr{LOF}\see{aut:cav:flt}
+%\item Disable citation and page trackers in floats\see{aut:cav:flt}
+%\item Improved on-demand loading of localization modules
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8c}{2009-01-10}
+%
+%\item Added <idem> tracker\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added package option \opt{idemtracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifciteidem}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifentryseen}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Improved citation style \texttt{verbose-trad1}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved citation style \texttt{verbose-trad2}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed \len{bibitemextrasep} to \len{bibnamesep}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Slightly modified \len{bibnamesep}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Added \len{bibinitsep}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Increased default value of \cnt{highnamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Increased default value of \cnt{lownamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:loc:us}
+%\item Added \cmd{uspunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Added \cmd{stdpunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Added \cmd{midsentence*}\see{aut:pct:ctr}
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8b}{2008-12-13}
+%
+%\item Added package/entry option \opt{usetranslator}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifusetranslator}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Consider \bibfield{translator} when sorting\see{use:srt}
+%\item Consider \bibfield{translator} when generating \bibfield{labelname}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{eventtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Support \bibfield{eventtitle} in \bibtype{proceedings} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Support \bibfield{eventtitle} in \bibtype{inproceedings} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added unsupported entry type \bibtype{commentary}\see{bib:typ:ctm}
+%\item Permit \cmd{NewBibliographyString} in \file{lbx} files\see{aut:lng:cmd}
+%\item Improved behavior of \cmd{mkbibquote} in <American-punctuation> mode\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8a}{2008-11-29}
+%
+%\item Updated documentation (important, please read)\see{int:feb}
+%\item Added package option \kvopt{hyperref}{auto}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{reading}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Updated \acr{KOMA}-Script support for version 3.x\see{use:cav:scr}
+%\item Slightly modified special field \bibfield{fullhash}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{DeclareNumChars*}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{DeclareRangeChars*}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{DeclareRangeCommands*}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{MakeSentenceCase}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareCaseLangs}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Support nested \cmd{mkbibquote} with American punctuation\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Improved \cmd{ifpunctmark}\see{aut:pct:chk}
+%\item Improved punctuation tracker\see{aut:pct:pct}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclarePunctuationPairs}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping}\see{aut:lng:cmd}
+%\item Added support for custom localization modules\see{aut:cav:lng}
+%\item Added extended \pdf bookmarks to this manual
+%\item Fixed various bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.8}{2008-10-02}
+%
+%\item Added \cmd{DefineHyphenationExceptions}\see{use:lng}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareHyphenationExceptions}\see{aut:lng:cmd}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkpagetotal}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Improved \acr{KOMA}-Script support\see{use:cav:scr}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifkomabibtotoc}\see{use:cav:scr}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifkomabibtotocnumbered}\see{use:cav:scr}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifmemoirbibintoc}\see{use:cav:mem}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:bib:hdg}
+%\item Updated documentation of \cmd{iffootnote}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added several new localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Rearranged some localization keys (\texttt{section} vs. \texttt{paragraph})\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added unsupported entry type \bibtype{letter}\see{bib:typ:ctm}
+%\item Added entry type \bibtype{suppbook}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added entry type \bibtype{suppcollection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added entry type \bibtype{suppperiodical}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Support \bibtype{reference} and \bibtype{inreference}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Support \bibtype{review} as an alias\see{bib:typ:ctm}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{origpublisher}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field alias \bibfield{annote}\see{bib:fld:als}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:cav:enc}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Removed \cmd{EnableCapitalAfter} and \cmd{DisableCapitalAfter}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Added support for <American-style> punctuation\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareQuotePunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Improved \cmd{mkbibquote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{use:loc:us}
+%\item Improved all \texttt{numeric} citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved \texttt{numeric} bibliography style\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{authoryear-ibid}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved all \texttt{authoryear} citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved \texttt{authoryear} bibliography style\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Added \opt{pageref} option to \texttt{verbose-note} style\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added \opt{pageref} option to \texttt{verbose-inote} style\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{reading}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added bibliography style \texttt{reading}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{draft}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added bibliography style \texttt{draft}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Improved \sty{natbib} compatibility style\see{use:cit:nat}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifcitation}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifbibliography}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{printfile}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Added package option \opt{loadfiles}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added support for bibliographic data in external files\see{use:use:prf}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:prf}
+%\item Modified field \bibfield{edition}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Modified special field \bibfield{labelyear}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Modified special field \bibfield{labelalpha}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added special field \bibfield{extraalpha}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{maxlabelyear}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{maxextraalpha}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added \cmd{mknumalph}\see{use:fmt:aux}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibacro}\see{use:fmt:aux}
+%\item Added \cmd{autocap}\see{use:fmt:aux}
+%\item Added package option \opt{firstinits}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added \cmd{iffirstinits}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added support for eprint data\see{use:use:epr}
+%\item Added support for arXiv\see{use:use:epr}
+%\item Expanded documentation \see{aut:cav:epr}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{eprint}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{eprinttype}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added eprint support to all standard entry types\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added package option \opt{arxiv}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Introduced concept of an entry set\see{use:use:set}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:set}
+%\item Added entry type \bibtype{set}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{entryset}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Added special field \bibfield{entrysetcount}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added \cmd{entrydata}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:mif}
+%\item Added \cmd{entryset}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{strfield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Improved \cmd{usedriver}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{bibpagespunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:pct}
+%\item Added entry option \opt{skipbib}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Added entry option \opt{skiplos}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Added entry option \opt{skiplab}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Added entry option \opt{dataonly}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Modified special field \bibfield{namehash}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added special field \bibfield{fullhash}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareNumChars}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareRangeChars}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareRangeCommands}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added support for Swedish (translations by Per Starbäck and others)
+%\item Updated various localization files
+%\item Various minor improvements throughout
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.7}{2007-12-09}
+%
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{int:feb}
+%\item New dependency on \sty{etoolbox} package\see{int:pre:req}
+%\item Made \sty{url} a required package\see{int:pre:req}
+%\item Modified package option \opt{sorting}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Introduced concept of an entry option\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Added option \bibfield{useauthor}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Added option \bibfield{useeditor}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Modified option \bibfield{useprefix}\see{use:opt:bib}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{useprefix}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{options}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:srt}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-ibid}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-icomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-cterse} to \texttt{authortitle-tcomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-verb} to \texttt{verbose}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-cverb} to \texttt{verbose-ibid}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{verbose-note}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{verbose-inote}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-trad} to \texttt{verbose-trad1}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Removed citation style \texttt{authortitle-strad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{verbose-trad2}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved citation style \texttt{authoryear}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved citation style \texttt{authoryear-comp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-terse}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-tcomp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved all verbose citation styles\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:fld:typ}
+%\item Modified entry type \bibtype{article}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added entry type \bibtype{periodical}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added entry type \bibtype{patent}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry types \bibfield{proceedings} and \bibfield{inproceedings}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibfield{article}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibfield{booklet}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibfield{misc}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added entry type alias \bibtype{electronic}\see{bib:typ:als}
+%\item Added new custom types\see{bib:typ:ctm}
+%\item Support \bibfield{pagetotal} field where applicable\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{holder}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{venue}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{version}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{journaltitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{journalsubtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{issuetitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{issuesubtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{journal}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field alias \bibfield{journal}\see{bib:fld:als}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{shortjournal}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{shortseries}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{shorthandintro}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{xref}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{authortype}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{editortype}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{reprinttitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Improved handling of field \bibfield{type}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Improved handling of field \bibfield{series}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{bib:use:ser}
+%\item Renamed field \bibfield{id} to \bibfield{eid}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{pagination}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{bookpagination}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added special field \bibfield{sortinit}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Introduced concept of a multicite command\see{use:cit:mlt}
+%\item Added \cmd{cites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
+%\item Added \cmd{Cites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
+%\item Added \cmd{parencites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
+%\item Added \cmd{Parencites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
+%\item Added \cmd{footcites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
+%\item Added \cmd{supercites}\see{use:cit:mlt}
+%\item Added \cmd{Autocite}\see{use:cit:aut}
+%\item Added \cmd{autocites}\see{use:cit:aut}
+%\item Added \cmd{Autocites}\see{use:cit:aut}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareMultiCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{multicitecount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{multicitetotal}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{citefulltitle} to \cmd{citetitle*}\see{use:cit:txt}
+%\item Added \cmd{cite*}\see{use:cit:cbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{citeurl}\see{use:cit:txt}
+%\item Added documentation of field \bibfield{nameaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{entrysubtype}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{execute}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Added custom fields \bibfield{verb{[a--c]}}\see{bib:fld:ctm}
+%\item Added custom fields \bibfield{name{[a--c]}type}\see{bib:fld:ctm}
+%\item Consider \bibfield{sorttitle} field when falling back to \bibfield{title}\see{use:srt}
+%\item Removed package option \opt{labelctitle}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Removed field \opt{labelctitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added package option \opt{singletitle}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifsingletitle}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifuseauthor}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifuseeditor}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifopcit}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifloccit}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added package option \opt{uniquename}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added special counter \cnt{uniquename}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added package option \opt{natbib}\see{use:opt:ldt}
+%\item Added compatibility commands for the \sty{natbib} package\see{use:cit:nat}
+%\item Added package option \opt{defernums}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Improved support for numeric labels\see{use:cav:lab}
+%\item Added package option \opt{mincrossrefs}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{bibencoding}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:cav:enc}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{bib:cav:ide}
+%\item Added package option \opt{citetracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added package option \opt{ibidtracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added package option \bibfield{opcittracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added package option \bibfield{loccittracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added \cmd{citetrackertrue} and \cmd{citetrackerfalse}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Modified package option \opt{pagetracker}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Added \cmd{pagetrackertrue} and \cmd{pagetrackerfalse}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Text commands now excluded from tracking\see{use:cit:txt}
+%\item Updated documentation of \cmd{iffirstonpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Updated documentation of \cmd{ifsamepage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Removed package option \opt{keywsort}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{refsection}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{refsegment}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{citereset}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Extended documentation of \env{refsection} environment\see{use:bib:sec}
+%\item Added \cmd{newrefsection}\see{use:bib:sec}
+%\item Added \cmd{newrefsegment}\see{use:bib:seg}
+%\item Added heading definition \texttt{subbibliography}\see{use:bib:hdg}
+%\item Added heading definition \texttt{subbibintoc}\see{use:bib:hdg}
+%\item Added heading definition \texttt{subbibnumbered}\see{use:bib:hdg}
+%\item Make all citation commands scan ahead for punctuation\see{use:cit}
+%\item Updated documentation of \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Removed \cmd{usecitecmd}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Updated documentation of \opt{autocite} package option\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Updated documentation of \opt{autopunct} package option\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added \cmd{citereset}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{citereset*}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{mancite}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{citesetup}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{compcitedelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{labelnamepunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{subtitlepunct}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{finallistdelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{andmoredelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{labelalphaothers}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \len{bibitemextrasep}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{blxauxprefix} to \cmd{blxauxsuffix}\see{use:use:aux}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareBibliographyOption}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareEntryOption}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{InitializeBibliographyDrivers} to \cmd{InitializeBibliographyStyle}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{InitializeCitationStyle}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{OnManualCitation}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Extended documentation of \cmd{DeclareCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareAutoCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved \cmd{printtext}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Improved \cmd{printfield}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Improved \cmd{printlist}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Improved \cmd{printnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Improved \cmd{indexfield}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Improved \cmd{indexlist}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Improved \cmd{indexnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareFieldAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareListAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexFieldAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexListAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Modified \cmd{DeclareIndexNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Improved \cmd{iffirstonpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Improved \cmd{ifciteseen}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Improved \cmd{ifandothers}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifinteger}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifnumeral}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifnumerals}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Removed \cmd{ifpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Removed \cmd{ifpages}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Moved \cmd{ifblank} to \sty{etoolbox} package\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Removed \cmd{xifblank}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Moved \cmd{docsvlist} to \sty{etoolbox} package\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Updated documentation of \cmd{docsvfield}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifciteibid}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{iffootnote}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{iffieldxref}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{iflistxref}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifnamexref}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifmoreitems}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifbibstring}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{iffieldbibstring}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkpageprefix}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{NumCheckSetup}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{pno}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{ppno}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{nopp}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{ppspace}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{psq}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{psqq}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{sqspace}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:use:pag}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav:pag}
+%\item Added \cmd{RN}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{Rn}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{RNfont}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{Rnfont}\see{use:cit:msc}
+%\item Added package option \opt{punctfont}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added \cmd{setpunctfont}\see{aut:pct:new}
+%\item Added \cmd{resetpunctfont}\see{aut:pct:new}
+%\item Added \cmd{nopunct}\see{aut:pct:pct}
+%\item Added \cmd{bibxstring}\see{aut:str}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibemph}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibquote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibfootnote}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added \cmd{mkbibsuperscript}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added \cmd{currentfield}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added \cmd{currentlist}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added \cmd{currentname}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtNextCite}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtNextCitekey}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtDataInput}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added several new localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added support for Norwegian (translations by Johannes Wilm)
+%\item Added support for Danish (translations by Johannes Wilm)
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:grp}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:cav:mif}
+%\item Numerous improvements under the hood
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.6}{2007-01-06}
+%
+%\item Added package option \kvopt{sorting}{none}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Renamed package option \kvopt{block}{penalty} to \kvopt{block}{ragged}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{origlanguage} back to field\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Support \bibfield{origlanguage} field if \bibfield{translator} is present\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Renamed field \bibfield{articleid} to \bibfield{id}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Support \bibfield{id} field in \bibfield{article} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Support \bibfield{series} field in \bibfield{article} entries\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Support \bibfield{doi} field\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Updated documentation of all entry types\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{series}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{redactor}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{shortauthor}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{shorteditor}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Improved support for corporate authors and editors\see{bib:use:inc}
+%\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelname}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added field alias \bibfield{key}\see{bib:fld:als}
+%\item Added package option \opt{autocite}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{autopunct}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added \cmd{autocite}\see{use:cit:aut}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareAutoCiteCommand}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareAutoPunctuation}\see{aut:pct:cfg}
+%\item Added option \opt{filter} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added \cmd{defbibfilter}\see{use:bib:flt}
+%\item Added package option \opt{maxitems}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{minitems}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{maxitems}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{minitems}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added adapted headings for \sty{scrartcl}, \sty{scrbook}, \sty{scrreprt}\see{int:pre:cmp}
+%\item Added adapted headings for \sty{memoir}\see{int:pre:cmp}
+%\item Added \cmd{Cite}\see{use:cit:std}
+%\item Added \cmd{Parencite}\see{use:cit:std}
+%\item Added \cmd{Textcite}\see{use:cit:cbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{parencite*}\see{use:cit:cbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{supercite}\see{use:cit:cbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{Citeauthor}\see{use:cit:txt}
+%\item Added \cmd{nameyeardelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{multilistdelim}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Completed documenation\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Completed documenation\see{aut:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{usecitecmd}\see{aut:cbx:cbx}
+%\item Added \cmd{hyphenate}\see{use:fmt:aux}
+%\item Added \cmd{hyphen}\see{use:fmt:aux}
+%\item Added \cmd{nbhyphen}\see{use:fmt:aux}
+%\item Improved \cmd{ifsamepage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Removed \cmd{ifnameequalstr}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Removed \cmd{iflistequalstr}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifcapital}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{MakeCapital}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added starred variant to \cmd{setunit}\see{aut:pct:new}
+%\item Improved \cmd{ifterm}\see{aut:pct:chk}
+%\item Straightened out documentation of \cmd{thelist}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Straightened out documentation of \cmd{thename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{docsvfield}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{docsvlist}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Removed \cmd{CopyFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Removed \cmd{CopyIndexFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Removed \cmd{CopyListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Removed \cmd{CopyIndexListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Removed \cmd{CopyNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Removed \cmd{CopyIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{savefieldformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorefieldformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{savelistformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorelistformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{savenameformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorenameformat}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{savebibmacro}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorebibmacro}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{savecommand}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorecommand}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added documentation of \texttt{shorthands} driver\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
+%\item Rearranged, renamed, and extended localization keys\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Renamed counter \cnt{citecount} to \cnt{instcount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added new counter \cnt{citecount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{citetotal}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Rearranged and expanded documentation\see{bib:use}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:cav}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav:scr}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav:mem}
+%\item Completed support for Spanish\see{use:loc:esp}
+%\item Added support for Italian (translations by Enrico Gregorio)
+%\item Added language alias \opt{australian}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Added language alias \opt{newzealand}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Various minor improvements throughout
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.5}{2006-11-12}
+%
+%\item Added \cmd{usedriver}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added package option \opt{pagetracker}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added \cmd{iffirstonpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifsamepage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Corrected documentation of \cmd{ifciteseen}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added package option \opt{terseinits}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Modified default value of package option \opt{maxnames}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Renamed package option \opt{index} to \opt{indexing}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Extended package option \opt{indexing}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Removed package option \opt{citeindex}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Removed package option \opt{bibindex}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{labelalpha}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelalpha}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added package option \opt{labelctitle}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelctitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added package option \opt{labelnumber}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelnumber}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added package option \opt{labelyear}\see{use:opt:pre:int}
+%\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{labelyear}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-verb}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-cverb}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{traditional} to \texttt{authortitle-trad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved citation style \texttt{authortitle-trad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added citation style \texttt{authortitle-strad}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{authoryear}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{authortitle}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbysection}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Renamed \env{bibsection} to \env{refsection} (conflict with \sty{memoir})\see{use:bib:sec}
+%\item Renamed \env{bibsegment} to \env{refsegment} (consistency)\see{use:bib:seg}
+%\item Extended \env{refsection} environment\see{use:bib:sec}
+%\item Renamed \env{bibsection} counter to \env{refsection}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Renamed \env{bibsegment} counter to \env{refsegment}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:use:mlt}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{citecount}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Modified default definition of \cmd{blxauxprefix}\see{use:use:aux}
+%\item Added \cmd{CopyFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{CopyIndexFieldFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{CopyListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{CopyIndexListFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{CopyNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{CopyIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added \cmd{clearfield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{clearlist}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{clearname}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorefield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorelist}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{restorename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{bibhyperlink} to \cmd{bibhyperref}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added new command \cmd{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{bibhypertarget}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Renamed formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperlink} to \texttt{bibhyperref}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added new formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added formatting directive \texttt{bibhypertarget}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added \cmd{addlpthinspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{addhpthinspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{annotator}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{commentator}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{introduction}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{foreword}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{afterword}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Updated documentation of field \bibfield{translator}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{articleid}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{doi}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{file}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field alias \bibfield{pdf}\see{bib:fld:als}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{indextitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{indexsorttitle}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{language}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{origlanguage}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{book}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{collection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{inbook}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Updated documentation of entry type \bibfield{incollection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibfield{misc}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added \cmd{UndefineBibliographyExtras}\see{use:lng}
+%\item Added \cmd{UndeclareBibliographyExtras}\see{aut:lng:cmd}
+%\item Added \cmd{finalandcomma}\see{use:fmt:lng}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{citedas}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Renamed localization key \texttt{editby} to \texttt{edited}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Renamed localization key \texttt{transby} to \texttt{translated}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{annotated}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{commented}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{introduced}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{foreworded}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{afterworded}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{commentary}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{annotations}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{introduction}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{foreword}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{afterword}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{doneby}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{itemby}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{spanish}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{latin}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{greek}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Modified localization key \texttt{fromenglish}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Modified localization key \texttt{fromfrench}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Modified localization key \texttt{fromgerman}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{fromspanish}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{fromlatin}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Added localization key \texttt{fromgreek}\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{bib:use}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:xbx:bbx}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{aut:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Updated and completed documentation\see{use:fmt:lng}
+%\item Updated and completed documentation\see{aut:fmt:lng}
+%\item Added support for Spanish (translations by Ignacio Fernández Galván)
+%\item Various memory-related optimizations in \path{biblatex.bst}
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.4}{2006-10-01}
+%
+%\item Added package option \opt{sortlos}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{bibtex8}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Made \bibfield{pageref} field local to \env{refsection} environment\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Renamed field \bibfield{labeltitle} to \bibfield{labelctitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added new field \bibfield{labeltitle}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added new field \bibfield{sortkey}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{use:srt}
+%\item Removed \cmd{iffieldtrue}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Renamed counter \cnt{namepenalty} to \cnt{highnamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Added counter \cnt{lownamepenalty}\see{use:fmt:len}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{noligature}\see{use:fmt:aux}
+%\item Added \cmd{addlowpenspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{addhighpenspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{addabbrvspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{adddotspace}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Added \cmd{addslash}\see{aut:pct:spc}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{use:cav}
+%\item Various minor improvements throughout
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.3}{2006-09-24}
+%
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle} to \texttt{authortitle-terse}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-comp} to \texttt{authortitle-cterse}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Renamed citation style \texttt{authortitle-verb} to \texttt{authortitle}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added new citation style \texttt{authortitle-comp}\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Citation style \texttt{traditional} now supports <loc.~cit.>\see{use:xbx:cbx}
+%\item Added package option \opt{date}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{urldate}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Introduced new data type: literal lists\see{bib:fld}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{citename} to \cmd{citeauthor}\see{use:cit:txt}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{citelist} to \cmd{citename}\see{use:cit:low}
+%\item Added new \cmd{citelist} command\see{use:cit:low}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{printlist} to \cmd{printnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Added new \cmd{printlist} command\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{indexlist} to \cmd{indexnames}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Added new \cmd{indexlist} command\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareListFormat} to \cmd{DeclareNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added new \cmd{DeclareListFormat} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareListAlias} to \cmd{DeclareNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added new \cmd{DeclareListAlias} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat} to \cmd{DeclareIndexNameFormat}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added new \cmd{DeclareIndexListFormat} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{DeclareIndexListAlias} to \cmd{DeclareIndexNameAlias}\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Added new \cmd{DeclareIndexListAlias} command\see{aut:bib:fmt}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{biblist} to \cmd{thename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added new \cmd{thelist} command\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{bibfield} to \cmd{thefield}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{savelist} to \cmd{savename}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added new \cmd{savelist} command\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{savelistcs} to \cmd{savenamecs}\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Added new \cmd{savelistcs} command\see{aut:aux:dat}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{iflistundef} to \cmd{ifnameundef}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added new \cmd{iflistundef} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{iflistsequal} to \cmd{ifnamesequal}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added new \cmd{iflistsequal} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{iflistequals} to \cmd{ifnameequals}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added new \cmd{iflistequals} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{iflistequalcs} to \cmd{ifnameequalcs}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added new \cmd{iflistequalcs} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{iflistequalstr} to \cmd{ifnameequalstr}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added new \cmd{iflistequalstr} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{ifcurrentlist} to \cmd{ifcurrentname}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added new \cmd{ifcurrentlist} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Entry type alias \bibtype{conference} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
+%\item Entry type alias \bibtype{mastersthesis} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
+%\item Entry type alias \bibtype{phdthesis} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
+%\item Entry type alias \bibtype{techreport} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
+%\item Entry type alias \bibtype{www} now resolved by \bibtex\see{bib:typ:als}
+%\item Added new custom fields \bibfield{lista} through \bibfield{listf}\see{bib:fld:ctm}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{location}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{origlocation}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{publisher}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{institution}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Changed data type of \bibfield{organization}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Modified values of \bibfield{gender} field for \sty{jurabib} compatibility\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Modified and extended \texttt{idem\dots} keys for \sty{jurabib} compatibility\see{aut:lng:key}
+%\item Improved \cmd{addtocategory}\see{use:bib:cat}
+%\item Removed formatting command \cmd{mkshorthand}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{shorthandwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{shorthandwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Removed formatting command \cmd{mklabelnumber}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{labelnumberwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{labelnumberwidth}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Removed formatting command \cmd{mklabelalpha}\see{use:fmt:fmt}
+%\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{labelalphawidth}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{labelalphawidth}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{bibitem} to \cmd{thebibitem}\see{aut:bbx:env}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{lositem} to \cmd{thelositem}\see{aut:bbx:env}
+%\item Modified \cmd{AtBeginBibliography}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtBeginShorthands}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtEveryLositem}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Extended \sty{showkeys} compatibility to list of shorthands\see{int:pre:cmp}
+%\item Added compatibility code for the \sty{hyperref} package\see{int:pre:cmp}
+%\item Added package option \opt{hyperref}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added package option \opt{backref}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{pageref}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifhyperref}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added \cmd{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:aux:msc}
+%\item Added field formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperlink}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+%\item Renamed \cmd{ifandothers} to \cmd{ifmorenames}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added new \cmd{ifandothers} test\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{moreauthor}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{morebookauthor}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{moreeditor}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{morelabelname}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{moretranslator}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{morenamea}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{morenameb}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Removed field \bibfield{morenamec}\see{aut:bbx:fld}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{aut:int}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:env}
+%\item Updated documentation\see{aut:bbx:drv}
+%\item Expanded documentation\see{aut:fmt}
+%\item Modified internal \bibtex interface
+%\item Fixed some typos in the manual
+%\item Fixed some bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.2}{2006-09-06}
+%
+%\item Added bibliography categories\see{use:bib:cat}
+%\item Added \cmd{DeclareBibliographyCategory}\see{use:bib:cat}
+%\item Added \cmd{addtocategory}\see{use:bib:cat}
+%\item Added \texttt{category} and \texttt{notcategory} filters\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Added usage examples for bibliography categories\see{use:use:div}
+%\item Added documentation of configuration file\see{use:cfg:cfg}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{ExecuteBibliographyOptions}\see{use:cfg:opt}
+%\item Added documentation of \cmd{AtBeginBibliography}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtEveryBibitem}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtEveryCite}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added \cmd{AtEveryCitekey}\see{aut:fmt:hok}
+%\item Added optional argument to \cmd{printtext}\see{aut:bib:dat}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifpage}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added \cmd{ifpages}\see{aut:aux:tst}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{titleaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{booktitleaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{maintitleaddon}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{library}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{part}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{origlocation}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{origtitle}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{origyear}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Added field \bibfield{origlanguage}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Modified profile of field \bibfield{language}\see{bib:fld:dat}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibtype{book}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibtype{inbook}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibtype{collection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibtype{incollection}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibtype{proceedings}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Extended entry type \bibtype{inproceedings}\see{bib:typ:blx}
+%\item Added entry type alias \bibtype{www}\see{bib:typ:als}
+%\item Added compatibility code for the \sty{showkeys} package\see{int:pre:cmp}
+%\item Support printable characters in \bibfield{keyword} and \texttt{notkeyword} filters\see{use:bib:bib}
+%\item Support printable characters in \bibfield{keywords} field\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Ignore spaces after commas in \bibfield{keywords} field\see{bib:fld:spc}
+%\item Internal rearrangement of all bibliography styles
+%\item Fixed various bugs
+%
+%\end{release}
+%
+%\begin{release}{0.1}{2006-09-02}
+%
+%\item Initial public release
+%
+%\end{release}
 
 \end{changelog}
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf
index 87ce9839dbf..c09a7d5152e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf
index 6c0604d96f8..5c5446099e8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.tex
index 485257212a6..4dfbf8fd7f7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% The example entries in examples.bib feature `annotation' fields
+% The example entries in examples.bib feature 'annotation' fields
 % with some remarks about the respective entry. The sole purpose of
 % this file is to print an annotated bibliography which includes
 % these fields.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf
index 897f8f9b5dc..7e643fe848b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.tex
index 53787cfc35f..76328595e6c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.tex
@@ -3,20 +3,26 @@
 % articles by different authors, such as a conference proceedings
 % volume for example. Each article is presented as a separate
 % chapter with its own bibliography. The citation labels are local
-% to the `refsection' environments.
+% to the 'refsection' environments.
 %
-% Note that this file is processed as follows:
+% With Biber, this file is processed as follows:
 %
-%   latex     file
-%   bibtex    file1-blx
-%   bibtex    file2-blx
-%   bibtex    file3-blx
-%   latex     file
+%   latex  file
+%   biber  file
+%   latex  file
+%
+% With BibTeX, this file is processed as follows:
+%
+%   latex  file
+%   bibtex file1-blx
+%   bibtex file2-blx
+%   bibtex file3-blx
+%   latex  file
 %
 % Note that the file name suffix may generally be omitted. It's
-% `latex file' and `bibtex file' rather than `latex file.tex' and
-% `bibtex file.aux'. Depending on the TeX distribution, omitting the
-% `aux' file prefix when invoking BibTeX may even by mandatory.
+% 'latex file' and 'bibtex file' rather than 'latex file.tex' and
+% 'bibtex file.aux'. Depending on the TeX distribution, omitting the
+% 'aux' file prefix when invoking BibTeX may even by mandatory.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf
index c87e4128d68..2516fd6f9ce 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.tex
index 54e20c3f1f9..f30c8b758a2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.tex
@@ -1,20 +1,26 @@
 %
-% This file is similar to the `per section' example except that
+% This file is similar to the 'per section' example except that
 % all references are printed at the end of the document. The
-% citation labels are still local to the `refsection' environments.
+% citation labels are still local to the 'refsection' environments.
 %
-% Note that this file is processed as follows:
+% With Biber, this file is processed as follows:
 %
-%   latex     file
-%   bibtex    file1-blx
-%   bibtex    file2-blx
-%   bibtex    file3-blx
-%   latex     file
+%   latex  file
+%   biber  file
+%   latex  file
+%
+% With BibTeX, this file is processed as follows:
+%
+%   latex  file
+%   bibtex file1-blx
+%   bibtex file2-blx
+%   bibtex file3-blx
+%   latex  file
 %
 % Note that the file name suffix may generally be omitted. It's
-% `latex file' and `bibtex file' rather than `latex file.tex' and
-% `bibtex file.aux'. Depending on the TeX distribution, omitting the
-% `aux' file prefix when invoking BibTeX may even by mandatory.
+% 'latex file' and 'bibtex file' rather than 'latex file.tex' and
+% 'bibtex file.aux'. Depending on the TeX distribution, omitting the
+% 'aux' file prefix when invoking BibTeX may even by mandatory.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf
index d0d3cd1c08c..5d777eb463b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex
index ca5b6c9e909..4ed175cccf3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.tex
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 %
-% This file differs from the `by section' example in that the
+% This file differs from the 'by section' example in that the
 % citation labels are assigned globally. They are not local to the
-% `refsegment' environments.
+% 'refsegment' environments.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf
index 74983da5caf..0968c1f412e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex
index 25922d457a0..e7ac2aa3646 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.tex
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
 % subdivide the list of references into primary and secondary
 % sources.
 %
-% The keyword filter depends on the `keywords' fields in the bib
-% file. The entries cited in this example look like this:
+% The keyword filter depends on the 'keywords' fields in the bib
+% file. The entries cited in this example are set up like this:
 % 
 %   @Type{key,
 %     keywords = {primary},
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf
index 29dbdc7f35a..47bcded8181 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.tex
index 6a797762a2c..07e6c44f89f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.tex
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 %
-% This example will yield the same output as the `keywords' example
+% This example will yield the same output as the 'keywords' example
 % but the approach is different. Instead of adding the filter
 % criteria to the bib file, we assign keys to categories in the
-% document preamble and use `category' filters to create a
+% document preamble and use 'category' filters to create a
 % subdivided bibliography.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf
index 23b51643244..76c5ea47176 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.tex
index c951e0419e7..ca7524a8705 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 %
 % This example demonstrates how to subdivide a bibliography by type,
-% using `type' filters.
+% using 'type' filters.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{book}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf
index 4af811240a5..1b224a22a75 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf
index a0224fe276b..35097f27d2d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf
index 1eb94bbf90b..32225b57630 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex
index 7ebc8ee188e..bbdd97761b8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
 %
 % This example demonstrates how hybrid citations, i.e., two
 % citations styles in a single document, may be implemented.
+% Note that the default styles which ship with bibatex do not
+% support hybrid citation schemes out of the box. This example
+% is merely a proof of concept.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..54af31fcb0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..283f6fd1f20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+%
+% Prefixes also work with alphabetic the styles.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=alphabetic]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\bibliography{biblatex-examples}
+% A catch-all filter for all items which are not assigned to a
+% dedicated sub-bibliography:
+\defbibfilter{other}{
+  not type=article
+  and
+  not type=book
+  and
+  not type=collection
+}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Prefixed alphabetic citations}
+
+% Some citations:
+\cite{angenendt, kastenholz, augustine, companion, jaffe, ctan}
+
+\nocite{*}
+
+% Let's print the overall heading of the bibliography first:
+\printbibheading
+
+% And now the sub-bibliographies: we use three of them (based on the
+% entry type). Each sub-bibliography assigns a different prefix. The
+% option is called 'prefixnumbers' because it was originally intended
+% for numeric citations only. It also works with alphabetic labels:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Articles},type=article,prefixnumbers={A-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Books},type=book,prefixnumbers={B-}]
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Collections},type=collection,prefixnumbers={C-}]
+
+% The catch-all sub-bibliography for all remaining types:
+\printbibliography[heading=subbibliography,title={Other Sources},filter=other,prefixnumbers={O-}]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.pdf
index f3c8b45773d..fa30d6b1a1b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.tex
index e71809385a4..2bf0ce51f4e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-basic.tex
@@ -1,45 +1,45 @@
 %
-% This file demonstrates indexing with the `makeidx' package.
+% This file demonstrates indexing with the 'makeidx' package.
 % This file is processed as follows:
 %
-%   latex     file
-%   bibtex    file
-%   latex     file
-%   makeindex file
-%   latex     file
+%   latex        file
+%   bibtex/biber file
+%   latex        file
+%   makeindex    file
+%   latex        file
 %
-% Note that the file name suffix may be omitted. It's `latex file'
-% and not `latex file.tex'.
+% Note that the file name suffix may be omitted. It's 'latex file'
+% and not 'latex file.tex'.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
 \usepackage[american]{babel}
 \usepackage{csquotes}
 %
-% We set the `indexing' package option (`indexing' is similar to
-% `indexing=true') to enable indexing in both citations and the
+% We set the 'indexing' package option ('indexing' is similar to
+% 'indexing=true') to enable indexing in both citations and the
 % bibliography. It is rather unusual to add bibliography entries to
-% the index so you will normally use `indexing=cite' instead. The
+% the index so you will normally use 'indexing=cite' instead. The
 % only reason we're indexing the bibliography in this example is to
-% get a larger index. For a change, let's also use the `authortitle'
+% get a larger index. For a change, let's also use the 'authortitle'
 % style in this example.
 \usepackage[indexing,style=authortitle]{biblatex}
 \bibliography{biblatex-examples}
 %
-% The `makeidx' package provides indexing facilities on a fairly
-% basic level. It is highly advisable to use the `index' package
+% The 'makeidx' package provides indexing facilities on a fairly
+% basic level. It is highly advisable to use the 'index' package
 % instead, even if you do not need the additional facilities
 % provided by this package, such as multiple indexes. The reason is
 % that the \index command defined by this package is more robust
-% than the basic command provided by `makeidx'.
+% than the basic command provided by 'makeidx'.
 \usepackage{makeidx}
 % We need to enable indexing globally by way of \makeindex.
 % Otherwise, no index is created at all, regardless of the
-% `indexing' option of biblatex.
+% 'indexing' option of biblatex.
 \makeindex
 %
-% Note that biblatex uses makeindex's `actual' operator to pass the
-% `indexsorttitle' field to makeindex. The default character used
+% Note that biblatex uses makeindex's 'actual' operator to pass the
+% 'indexsorttitle' field to makeindex. The default character used
 % is '@'. If the makeindex style uses a different character, i.e.,
 % if the .ist file contains a line like this
 %
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.pdf
index c2edd1d2c61..940b0590293 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.tex
index 36ec2afbfc7..3e617eb081b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-advanced.tex
@@ -1,35 +1,35 @@
 %
-% This file demonstrates indexing with the `index' package.
+% This file demonstrates indexing with the 'index' package.
 % This file is processed as follows:
 %
-%   latex     file
-%   bibtex    file
-%   latex     file
+%   latex        file
+%   bibtex/biber file
+%   latex        file
 %   makeindex -o file.ind file.idx (= makeindex file)
 %   makeindex -o file.nnd file.ndx
 %   makeindex -o file.tnd file.tdx
-%   latex     file
+%   latex        file
 %
-% Note that the file name suffix may be omitted. It's `latex file'
-% and not `latex file.tex'. Also note that `-t <file>' is optional.
+% Note that the file name suffix may be omitted. It's 'latex file'
+% and not 'latex file.tex'. Also note that '-t <file>' is optional.
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
 \usepackage[american]{babel}
 \usepackage{csquotes}
 %
-% We set the `indexing' package option and use the `authortitle'
+% We set the 'indexing' package option and use the 'authortitle'
 % style in this example.
 \usepackage[indexing,style=authortitle,babel=hyphen]{biblatex}
 \bibliography{biblatex-examples}
 %
-% The `index' package provides advanced indexing facilities with
+% The 'index' package provides advanced indexing facilities with
 % support for multiple indexes.
 \usepackage{index}
 %
 % We want three indexes: a general index, an index of names, and an
 % index of titles. They are defined by way of \newindex, see the
-% documentation of the `index' package for details.
+% documentation of the 'index' package for details.
 \newindex{default}{idx}{ind}{Subject Index}
 \newindex{names}{ndx}{nnd}{Name Index}
 \newindex{titles}{tdx}{tnd}{Title Index}
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 %     \usebibmacro{index:name}{\index}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
 %   }
 %
-% As you can see, the data is simply passed on to a `bibmacro' which
+% As you can see, the data is simply passed on to a 'bibmacro' which
 % takes care of the formatting of the name. The definition of the
 % bibmacro, which is also found in biblatex.def, is not relevant in
 % our example because all we want to do is change or rather extend
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
 }
 %
 % Titles are handled in a similar way. The formatting directive we
-% need to modify is `indextitle'. It's default definition looks like
+% need to modify is 'indextitle'. It's default definition looks like
 % this:
 %
 %   \DeclareIndexFieldFormat{indextitle}{%
@@ -75,8 +75,8 @@
 % default, biblatex will index the author or editor and the title of
 % all references. This behavior may be modified as desired. The
 % indexing facilities are not hard-coded. All standard styles which
-% ship with this package call two `bibmacros' which handle the
-% indexing. These macros are called `citeindex' and `bibindex', both
+% ship with this package call two 'bibmacros' which handle the
+% indexing. These macros are called 'citeindex' and 'bibindex', both
 % of which are defined in biblatex.def. The former handles indexing
 % in citations, the latter in the bibliography. Their default
 % definitions are as follows:
@@ -93,10 +93,10 @@
 %	 \indexfield{indextitle}}
 %       {}}
 %
-% The `labelname' field is a copy of the `author' field, if there is
-% an author, or a copy of the `editor' field otherwise. `indextitle'
-% is the `indextitle' field, if defined in the bib file, or a copy
-% of the `title' field otherwise.
+% The 'labelname' field is a copy of the 'author' field, if there is
+% an author, or a copy of the 'editor' field otherwise. 'indextitle'
+% is the 'indextitle' field, if defined in the bib file, or a copy
+% of the 'title' field otherwise.
 %
 % The mechanism works like this: the \indexnames and \indexfield
 % fields tell biblatex which data to add to the index, the indexing
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf
index ca9dc6303f2..237d31ea898 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.tex
index 432c9c61921..f2095213aca 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `numeric' style
+% This file presents the 'numeric' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
 \subsection*{Multiple citations}
 
 % By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
-% enable sorting by setting the `sortcites' package option.
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
 
 \cite{companion,augustine,bertram,cotton,hammond,massa,murray}
 
@@ -79,13 +79,13 @@ This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
 
 \cite{set,hammond,stdmodel,massa,murray}
 
-% Note that this style provides a package option called `subentry'
+% Note that this style provides a package option called 'subentry'
 % which affects the handling of citations referring to members of
 % a reference set. If this option is enabled, such citations get an
 % extra letter which identifies the member (it is also printed in
 % the bibliography):
 
-\cite{stdmodel:glashow,set:yoon,stdmodel:salam,set:aksin}
+\cite{glashow,yoon,salam,aksin}
 
 % Note that this options is disabled by default but has been enabled
 % in this example. If disabled, citations referring to a set member
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf
index e5431f7600d..1622aaad187 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex
index 2cc840d8640..9f781ba34ae 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.tex
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ time.
 
 \cite{bertram,companion,cotton,augustine,massa,set,hammond,murray,stdmodel}
 
-\cite{set:yoon,stdmodel:weinberg,set:herrmann}
+\cite{yoon,weinberg}
 
 \subsection*{Multiple citations with \cmd{supercite}}
 
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This is just filler text.\supercite{augustine,bertram,cotton,hammond,set,massa,m
 
 This is just filler text.\supercite{bertram,companion,cotton,augustine,massa,set,hammond,murray,stdmodel}
 
-This is just filler text.\supercite{set:yoon,stdmodel:weinberg,set:herrmann}
+This is just filler text.\supercite{yoon,weinberg}
 
 \clearpage
 \printbibliography
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf
index 70d045a9d7e..b31569c6749 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex
index 40cd978f5e8..91db7178243 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.tex
@@ -22,13 +22,13 @@ multiple citations is printed in a slightly more verbose format.
 
 \cite{hammond,massa,augustine,cotton,set,murray,bertram,stdmodel}
 
-\cite{set:yoon,stdmodel:salam,set:herrmann}
+\cite{yoon,salam}
 
 \subsection*{Multiple citations with \cmd{supercite}}
 
 This is just filler text.\supercite{hammond,massa,augustine,cotton,set,murray,bertram,stdmodel}
 
-This is just filler text.\supercite{set:yoon,stdmodel:salam,set:herrmann}
+This is just filler text.\supercite{yoon,salam}
 
 \clearpage
 \printbibliography
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf
index 91cae0b9540..f0e103bd16f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex
index e7845c7d5b8..726ecb56bb7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `alphabetic' style
+% This file presents the 'alphabetic' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
 \subsection*{Multiple citations}
 
 % By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
-% enable sorting by setting the `sortcites' package option.
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
 
 \cite{companion,augustine,bertram,cotton,hammond,massa,murray}
 
@@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ This is just filler text \autocite{companion}.
 
 % The list of references
 
+\nocite{*}
 \printbibliography
 
 \end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf
index 302c19612c1..bd538a8b143 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf
index 139977417b1..0e6ec71d2d8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex
index 189bef0ffef..0a5659a29a4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authoryear' style
+% This file presents the 'authoryear' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -29,6 +29,30 @@ option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
 preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
 \texttt{dashed=true}.
 
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether or not date
+specifications are merged with the date label which is printed after
+the author in the bibliography. For example, while
+\texttt{mergedate=false} outputs:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5 (May
+2008), pp.~5--24.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{mergedate=true} will print:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (May 2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5,
+pp.~15--34.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The default setting is \texttt{mergedate=true}. Note that this
+options only affects the bibliography. Citations never include full
+dates anyway. In this example, the citation will be \enquote{Doe
+2008a} in both cases.
+
 \subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
 
 \cite{companion}
@@ -91,13 +115,13 @@ text \autocite*{companion}.
 \subsection*{Multiple citations}
 
 % By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
-% enable sorting by setting the `sortcites' package option.
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
 
 \cite{knuth:ct:c,aristotle:physics,knuth:ct:b,aristotle:poetics,aristotle:rhetoric,knuth:ct:d}
 
 \subsection*{Shorthand examples}
 
-% If an entry in the bib file includes a `shorthand' field, the
+% If an entry in the bib file includes a 'shorthand' field, the
 % shorthand replaces the regular author-title citation.
 
 \cite{kant:kpv,kant:ku}
@@ -112,8 +136,8 @@ text \autocite*{companion}.
 % author or editor and that recurring author and editor names are
 % replaced by a dash unless the entry is the first one on the
 % current page or double page spread (depending on the setting of
-% the `pagetracker' package option). This style will implicitly set
-% `pagetracker=spread' at load time.
+% the 'pagetracker' package option). This style will implicitly set
+% 'pagetracker=spread' at load time.
 
 \nocite{*}
 \printbibliography
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf
index 0bd2c87faa1..0a1baabbd11 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex
index 27194cab9a8..1e4bccaa058 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authoryear-ibid' style
+% This file presents the 'authoryear-ibid' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -43,6 +43,30 @@ option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
 preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
 \texttt{dashed=true}.
 
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether or not date
+specifications are merged with the date label which is printed after
+the author in the bibliography. For example, while
+\texttt{mergedate=false} outputs:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5 (May
+2008), pp.~5--24.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{mergedate=true} will print:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (May 2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5,
+pp.~15--34.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The default setting is \texttt{mergedate=true}. Note that this
+options only affects the bibliography. Citations never include full
+dates anyway. In this example, the citation will be \enquote{Doe
+2008a} in both cases.
+
 \subsection*{Hints}
 
 If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
@@ -56,12 +80,12 @@ redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
 
 This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
 % Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
-% abbreviation `ibidem'...
+% abbreviation 'ibidem'...
 This is just filler text.\footcite{companion}
 \clearpage
 % ... unless the citation is the first one on the current page
 % or double page spread (depending on the setting of the
-% `pagetracker' package option).
+% 'pagetracker' package option).
 This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{companion}
 This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{companion}
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf
index 960ab6a30b3..ffcb90a41d2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex
index 020f96eb1c3..e5bb56d347a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.tex
@@ -33,6 +33,30 @@ option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
 preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
 \texttt{dashed=true}.
 
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether or not date
+specifications are merged with the date label which is printed after
+the author in the bibliography. For example, while
+\texttt{mergedate=false} outputs:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5 (May
+2008), pp.~5--24.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{mergedate=true} will print:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (May 2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5,
+pp.~15--34.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The default setting is \texttt{mergedate=true}. Note that this
+options only affects the bibliography. Citations never include full
+dates anyway. In this example, the citation will be \enquote{Doe
+2008a} in both cases.
+
 \subsection*{Multiple citations}
 
 \cite{knuth:ct:c,aristotle:physics,knuth:ct:b,aristotle:poetics,aristotle:rhetoric,knuth:ct:d}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf
index d315c4fb4ba..c7bc160f401 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex
index add935eb6c0..8b15dfeb341 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.tex
@@ -41,6 +41,30 @@ option \texttt{dashed}. Setting \texttt{dashed=false} in the
 preamble will disable this feature. The default setting is
 \texttt{dashed=true}.
 
+\subsubsection*{The \texttt{mergedate} option}
+
+The \texttt{mergedate} option controls whether or not date
+specifications are merged with the date label which is printed after
+the author in the bibliography. For example, while
+\texttt{mergedate=false} outputs:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5 (May
+2008), pp.~5--24.
+\end{quote}
+%
+\texttt{mergedate=true} will print:
+
+\begin{quote}
+Doe, John (May 2008a). \enquote{Article}. In: \emph{Journal} 23.5,
+pp.~15--34.
+\end{quote}
+%
+The default setting is \texttt{mergedate=true}. Note that this
+options only affects the bibliography. Citations never include full
+dates anyway. In this example, the citation will be \enquote{Doe
+2008a} in both cases.
+
 \subsection*{Hints}
 
 If you want terms such as \emph{ibidem} to be printed in italics,
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf
index 403c0e69204..c258ce79478 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex
index 43b84f6c2f8..93137174e1d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authortitle' style
+% This file presents the 'authortitle' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -94,13 +94,13 @@ This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
 \subsection*{Multiple citations}
 
 % By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
-% enable sorting by setting the `sortcites' package option.
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
 
 \cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
 
 \subsection*{Shorthand examples}
 
-% If an entry in the bib file includes a `shorthand' field, the
+% If an entry in the bib file includes a 'shorthand' field, the
 % shorthand replaces the regular author-title citation.
 
 \cite{kant:kpv,kant:ku}
@@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ This is just filler text \autocite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
 % author or editor and that recurring author and editor names are
 % replaced by a dash unless the entry is the first one on the
 % current page or double page spread (depending on the setting of
-% the `pagetracker' package option). This style will implicitly set
-% `pagetracker=true' at load time.
+% the 'pagetracker' package option). This style will implicitly set
+% 'pagetracker=true' at load time.
 
 \nocite{*}
 \printbibliography
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf
index 8bb51e6f91f..ea94da985a0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex
index f544c93afa2..f0f41505876 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authortitle-ibid' style
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-ibid' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -56,12 +56,12 @@ redefine \cmd{mkibid} as follows:
 
 This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
 % Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
-% abbreviation `ibidem'...
+% abbreviation 'ibidem'...
 This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
 \clearpage
 % ... unless the citation is the first one on the current page
 % or double page spread (depending on the setting of the
-% `pagetracker' package option).
+% 'pagetracker' package option).
 This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{aristotle:rhetoric}
 This is just filler text.\footcite[55]{aristotle:rhetoric}
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf
index f7cb65b4c8f..cc5f9360726 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf
index c379fffbbe4..5428887449c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex
index 6078a9d589a..22e2b323049 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authortitle-icomp' style
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-icomp' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf
index 90bc603eadd..15de72b0142 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex
index a5c3e34231d..37a839b4954 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authortitle-terse' style
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-terse' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ text \autocite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
 \subsection*{Multiple citations}
 
 % By default, a list of multiple citations is not sorted. You can
-% enable sorting by setting the `sortcites' package option.
+% enable sorting by setting the 'sortcites' package option.
 
 \cite{aristotle:rhetoric,averroes/bland,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf
index 1e9675d7b12..50eb06949d2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex
index 27f676bbd8a..a14dd70ec12 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authortitle-tcomp' style
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-tcomp' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf
index 324042d8b12..fbbf538abd3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex
index 7b8e3260eae..095b968edad 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `authortitle-ticomp' style
+% This file presents the 'authortitle-ticomp' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf
index 2ce0630c994..95bd617e079 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.tex
index 27af0cb71fe..ca173da0b31 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `verbose' style
+% This file presents the 'verbose' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
 
 \clearpage
 
-% If the `shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
 % on the first citation.
 This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
 This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf
index 75c4f5185e8..d92ee7664e2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex
index a88e544a257..6a672939f3c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `verbose-ibid' style
+% This file presents the 'verbose-ibid' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf
index 7e0886b7433..c20d47755e3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex
index 8988849cbf3..6f32dd1faae 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `verbose-note' style
+% This file presents the 'verbose-note' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ This is just filler text \footcite{averroes/bland}.
 
 \clearpage
 
-% If the `shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
 % on the first citation.
 This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
 This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf
index c3cf9d95694..52d2d07daa8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex
index 7bd051346e3..b3a66694523 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.tex
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ This is just filler text \footcite{averroes/bland}.
 \clearpage
 
 % Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the
-% abbreviation `ibidem'...
+% abbreviation 'ibidem'...
 This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
 This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:anima}
 This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
@@ -163,13 +163,13 @@ This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
 \clearpage
 % ... unless the citation is the first one on the current page
 % or double page spread (depending on the setting of the
-% `pagetracker' package option).
+% 'pagetracker' package option).
 This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
 This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:physics}
 
 \clearpage
 
-% If the `shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
 % on the first citation.
 This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:kpv}
 This is just filler text.\footcite{kant:ku}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf
index 05a71731f28..ede9a4054b2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex
index adffa130154..d824aaa2b2b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `verbose-trad1' style
+% This file presents the 'verbose-trad1' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ This is just filler text.\footcite[25]{aristotle:physics}
 
 \clearpage
 
-% If the `shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
+% If the 'shorthand' field is defined, the shorthand is introduced
 % on the first citation. All subsequent citations will then use the
 % shorthand.
 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf
index e233b378650..1e60e0ff6a6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf
index e4565ee7047..d3bea5a1b1f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf
index f1260eebd30..ce198b94025 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.tex
index 68ff47a59ad..523304da58f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `reading' style
+% This file presents the 'reading' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf
index 3914b08cb12..6730dec0a4c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.tex
index f80759973ac..dd47330d884 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `draft' style
+% This file presents the 'draft' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf
index e8e1474acfc..837b78d31a8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.tex
index c86846a771b..e51be6167b4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.tex
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 %
-% This file presents the `debug' style
+% This file presents the 'debug' style
 %
 \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
 \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
index fbf41dd3650..cdacbc0a36c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+@PREAMBLE{ "\RequireBiber[2]" }
 @STRING{anch-ie	  = {Angew.~Chem. Int.~Ed.} }
 @STRING{cup	  = {Cambridge University Press} }
 @STRING{dtv	  = {Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag} }
@@ -22,19 +23,28 @@
 }
 
 @Set{set,
-  crossref	  = {set:herrmann},
-  entryset	  = {set:herrmann,set:aksin,set:yoon},
-  annotation	  = {A \texttt{set} entry with three members. Note the \texttt{entryset} and
-		    \texttt{crossref} fields. The cross-reference must point to the first member of
-		    the set}
+  entryset	  = {herrmann,aksin,yoon},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{set} with three members}
 }
 
 @Set{stdmodel,
-  crossref	  = {stdmodel:glashow},
-  entryset	  = {stdmodel:glashow,stdmodel:weinberg,stdmodel:salam},
-  annotation	  = {A \texttt{set} entry with three members discussing the standard model of
-		    particle physics. Note the \texttt{entryset} and \texttt{crossref} fields. The
-		    cross-reference must point to the first member of the set}
+  entryset	  = {glashow,weinberg,salam},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{set} with three members discussing the standard model of
+		    particle physics}
+}
+
+@Article{aksin,
+  author	  = {Aks{\i}n, {\"O}zge and T{\"u}rkmen, Hayati and Artok, Levent and
+		    {\k{C}}etinkaya, Bekir and Ni, Chaoying and B{\"u}y{\"u}kg{\"u}ng{\"o}r, Orhan
+		    and {\"O}zkal, Erhan},
+  indextitle	  = {Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics},
+  title		  = {Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics of saturated
+		    Pd-N-heterocyclic carbenes in Mizoroki-Heck reactions},
+  journaltitle	  = jomch,
+  volume	  = {691},
+  number	  = {13},
+  date		  = {2006},
+  pages		  = {3027--3036}
 }
 
 @Article{angenendt,
@@ -94,6 +104,28 @@
 		    Note that format of the \texttt{series} field in the database file}
 }
 
+@Article{glashow,
+  author	  = {Glashow, Sheldon},
+  title		  = {Partial Symmetries of Weak Interactions},
+  journaltitle	  = {Nucl.~Phys.},
+  volume	  = {22},
+  date		  = {1961},
+  pages		  = {579--588}
+}
+
+@Article{herrmann,
+  author	  = {Herrmann, Wolfgang A. and {\"O}fele, Karl and Schneider, Sabine K. and
+		    Herdtweck, Eberhardt and Hoffmann, Stephan D.},
+  indextitle	  = {Carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst, A},
+  title		  = {A carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst ligand for C--C coupling
+		    reactions},
+  journaltitle	  = anch-ie,
+  volume	  = {45},
+  number	  = {23},
+  date		  = {2006},
+  pages		  = {3859--3862}
+}
+
 @Article{kastenholz,
   hyphenation	  = {american},
   author	  = {Kastenholz, M. A. and H{\"u}nenberger, Philippe H.},
@@ -162,48 +194,6 @@
 		    is appended automatically}
 }
 
-@Article{set:aksin,
-  entryset	  = {set},
-  author	  = {Aks{\i}n, {\"O}zge and T{\"u}rkmen, Hayati and Artok, Levent and
-		    {\k{C}}etinkaya, Bekir and Ni, Chaoying and B{\"u}y{\"u}kg{\"u}ng{\"o}r, Orhan
-		    and {\"O}zkal, Erhan},
-  indextitle	  = {Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics},
-  title		  = {Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics of saturated
-		    Pd-N-heterocyclic carbenes in Mizoroki-Heck reactions},
-  journaltitle	  = jomch,
-  volume	  = {691},
-  number	  = {13},
-  date		  = {2006},
-  pages		  = {3027--3036}
-}
-
-@Article{set:herrmann,
-  entryset	  = {set},
-  author	  = {Herrmann, Wolfgang A. and {\"O}fele, Karl and Schneider, Sabine K. and
-		    Herdtweck, Eberhardt and Hoffmann, Stephan D.},
-  indextitle	  = {Carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst, A},
-  title		  = {A carbocyclic carbene as an efficient catalyst ligand for C--C coupling
-		    reactions},
-  journaltitle	  = anch-ie,
-  volume	  = {45},
-  number	  = {23},
-  date		  = {2006},
-  pages		  = {3859--3862}
-}
-
-@Article{set:yoon,
-  entryset	  = {set},
-  author	  = {Yoon, Myeong S. and Ryu, Dowook and Kim, Jeongryul and Ahn, Kyo Han},
-  indextitle	  = {Palladium pincer complexes},
-  title		  = {Palladium pincer complexes with reduced bond angle strain: efficient catalysts
-		    for the Heck reaction},
-  journaltitle	  = {Organometallics},
-  volume	  = {25},
-  number	  = {10},
-  date		  = {2006},
-  pages		  = {2409--2411}
-}
-
 @Article{shore,
   author	  = {Shore, Bradd},
   title		  = {Twice-Born, Once Conceived},
@@ -275,24 +265,25 @@
   annotation	  = {A plain \texttt{article} entry}
 }
 
-@Article{stdmodel:glashow,
-  entryset	  = {stdmodel},
-  author	  = {Glashow, Sheldon},
-  title		  = {Partial Symmetries of Weak Interactions},
-  journaltitle	  = {Nucl.~Phys.},
-  volume	  = {22},
-  date		  = {1961},
-  pages		  = {579\psqq}
-}
-
-@Article{stdmodel:weinberg,
-  entryset	  = {stdmodel},
+@Article{weinberg,
   author	  = {Weinberg, Steven},
   title		  = {A Model of Leptons},
   journaltitle	  = {Phys.~Rev.~Lett.},
   volume	  = {19},
   date		  = {1967},
-  pages		  = {1264\psqq}
+  pages		  = {1264--1266}
+}
+
+@Article{yoon,
+  author	  = {Yoon, Myeong S. and Ryu, Dowook and Kim, Jeongryul and Ahn, Kyo Han},
+  indextitle	  = {Palladium pincer complexes},
+  title		  = {Palladium pincer complexes with reduced bond angle strain: efficient catalysts
+		    for the Heck reaction},
+  journaltitle	  = {Organometallics},
+  volume	  = {25},
+  number	  = {10},
+  date		  = {2006},
+  pages		  = {2409--2411}
 }
 
 @Book{aristotle:anima,
@@ -396,7 +387,7 @@
   indextitle	  = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
   title		  = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \mkbibquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der
 		    Conjunktion} oder \mkbibquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}},
-  shorttitle	  = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  shorttitle	  = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
   publisher	  = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
   location	  = {Halle an der Saale},
   date		  = {1892},
@@ -1038,8 +1029,7 @@
 		    Also note the \texttt{eventdate} field.}
 }
 
-@InProceedings{stdmodel:salam,
-  entryset	  = {stdmodel},
+@InProceedings{salam,
   author	  = {Salam, Abdus},
   editor	  = {Svartholm, Nils},
   title		  = {Weak and Electromagnetic Interactions},
@@ -1051,7 +1041,7 @@
   publisher	  = {Almquist \& Wiksell},
   location	  = {Stockholm},
   date		  = {1968},
-  pages		  = {367\psqq}
+  pages		  = {367--377}
 }
 
 @Manual{cms,